OOWWNNEERR''SS
MMAANNUUAALL
TUCSON
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and
explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may
find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-
lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽✽
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-
fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-
ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
Copyright 2009 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor America.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai
specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-4 in the
Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
F5
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same
parts used by Hyundai Motor
Company to manufacture vehicles.
They are designed and tested for the
optimum safety, performance, and reli-
ability to our customers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid manu-
facturing requirements. Using imita-
tion, counterfeit or used salvage parts
is not covered under the Hyundai New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other
Hyundai warranty.
In addition, any damage to or failure of
Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the
installation or failure of an imitation,
counterfeit or used salvage part is not
covered by any Hyundai Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are purchas-
ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Logo on the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to
are packaged with labels written only
in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold
through authorized Hyundai Dealerships.
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
A100A03L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications, Consumer information,
Reporting safety defects
Index
table of contents
Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle's spe-
cific warranty coverage.
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 7. As the owner, it is your
responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at
the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent main-
tenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions
are also included in Section 7.
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
ORIGINAL OWNER _____________________________________________________
ADDRESS
CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________
DELIVERY DATE
(Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser)
DEALER NAME _______________ DEALER NO. _____________________________
ADDRESS ____________________________________________________________
CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________
1
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-3
Vehicle handling instructions / 1-5
Vehicle break-in process / 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-6
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-7
Introduction
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an alpha-
betical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manu-
al. These WARNINGs were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.You should
carefully read and follow ALL procedures
and recommendations provided in these
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
13
Introduction
Your new vehicle is designed to use only
unleaded fuel having a pump octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-
erwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
Introduction
41
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-
cent gasoline, and is manufactured
exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel
Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with
your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in
poor engine performance and damage to
your vehicle's engine and fuel system.
HYUNDAI recommends that customers
do not use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Gasolines for cleaner air
To help contribute to cleaner air,
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
gasolines treated with detergent addi-
tives, which help prevent deposit forma-
tion in the engine. These gasolines will
help the engine run cleaner and enhance
performance of the Emission Control
System.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel
system or any performance prob-
lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
15
Introduction
As with other vehicles of this type, failure
to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher
ground clearance, track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of gravity than
other types of vehicles. In other words
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel
drive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. Again, failure to oper-
ate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the “Reducing
the risk of a rollover” driving guide-
lines, in section 5 of this manual.
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, economy
and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200
miles (2,000 km) of operation.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESSVEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
61
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hit-
ting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehi-
cle's systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-
cle is designed to record such data
as:
* How various systems in your vehicle
were operating:
* Whether or not the driver and pas-
senger safety belts were buckled/
fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situa-
tion occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, spe-
cial equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacture,
other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
17
Introduction
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
❈ For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.
Seat belt warning light
Tailgate open warning light
High beam indicator
Light on indicator
Turn signal indicator
Front fog light indicator*
ABS warning light
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light
AWD system warning light*
AWD LOCK indicator*
Malfunction indicator
Air bag warning light
Low fuel level warning light
DBC indicator*
Charging system warning light
Door ajar warning light
* : if equipped
ESC indicator*
ESC OFF indicator*
Low tire pressure telltale
ECO indicator*
Shift pattern indicator*
Manual transaxle shift indicator*
Engine coolant temperature
warning light
Electric power steering (EPS)
system warning light
Cruise indicator*
Cruise SET indicator*
2
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-10
2. Power window switches ....................4-15
3. Central door lock switch....................4-10
4. Power window lock button ................4-18
5. Outside rearview mirror control
switch................................................4-32
6. Fuel filler lid release lever.................4-21
7. Instrument panel illumination control
switch................................................4-34
8. AWD LOCK button* ..........................5-18
9. DBC button* .....................................5-33
10. ESC OFF button*............................5-30
11. Fuse box .........................................7-51
12. Steering wheel ................................4-28
13. Steering wheel tilt control ...............4-28
14. Seat...................................................3-2
15. Hood release lever..........................4-19
16. Parking brake pedal*.......................5-25
17. Brake pedal.....................................5-24
18. Accelerator pedal..............................5-6
* : if equipped
OLM019001N
23
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Light control / Turn signals..................4-50
2. Steering wheel audio controls*...........4-90
3. Bluetooth phone controls* ................4-111
4. Instrument cluster ...............................4-33
5. Horn....................................................4-29
6. Driver’s front air bag ...........................3-49
7. Wiper/Washer .....................................4-54
8. Auto cruise controls*...........................5-36
9. Ignition switch ......................................5-5
10. Digital clock and Audio*....................4-86
11. Hazard warning flasher switch ...4-49/6-2
12. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
..........................................................3-44
13. Climate control system*............4-62/4-71
14. Seat warmer*....................................3-10
15. Cigar lighter* .....................................4-83
16. Aux, USB and iPod port* ..................4-91
17. Power outlet ......................................4-85
18. Ashtray* ............................................4-83
19. Cup holder ........................................4-84
20. Center console box...........................4-81
21. Shift lever..........................................5-10
22. Passenger’s front air bag..................3-49
23. Air vent..............................................4-65
24. Glove box..........................................4-81
* : if equipped
OLM019002N
Your vehicle at a glance
42
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-22
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-21
3. Brake/Clutch* fluid reservoir .............7-25
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-28
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-52
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-34
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-34
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-24
9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-21
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir...7-26
* : if equipped
OLM079001
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
3
Seats / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-16
Child restraint system / 3-30
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-38
Safety features of your vehicle
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)*
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest
Rear seat
(7) Seatback folding
(8) Headrest
(9) Armrest
(10) Seat warmer*
*: if equipped
SEATS
OLM039001
Manual seat
Power seat
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. We recom-
mend that your chest be at least
10 inches (250 mm) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
Riding in a vehicle with the seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
seat is reclined during an accident,
the occupant’s hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the passen-
ger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
(Continued)
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and backwards.
• To avoid the possibility of burns,
do not remove the carpet in the
cargo area. Emission control
devices beneath this floor gener-
ate high temperatures.
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passen-
gers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks while the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly while riding.
(Continued)
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or backward without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment - manual
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
under the front edge of the seat cush-
ion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the
seatback recline lever located on the
outside of the seat at the rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever that is located on the out-
side of the seat cushion upwards or
downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever
up several times.
OLM039004OLM039003OLM039002
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by using
the control knob located on the outside of
the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust
the seat to the proper position so as to
easily control the steering wheel, pedals
and switches on the instrument panel.
Forward and backward
Push the control knob forward or back-
ward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the knob once the seat
reaches the desired position.
OLM039006
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is complet-
ed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control knobs at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the car.
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback angle
Push the control knob forward or back-
ward to move the seatback to the desired
angle. Release the knob once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
Pull the control knob up to raise or down
to lower the seat cushion. Release the
knob once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the button.
OLM039007 OLM039008 OLM039009
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps to protect the head and neck
in the event of a collision.
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
3 different positions by pulling the head-
rest forward to the desired detent. To
adjust the headrest to it’s furthest back-
wards position, pull it fully forward to the
farthest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
OLM039303N
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest posi-
tion of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
OLM039010
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
Active headrest (if equipped)
The active headrest is designed to move
forward and upward during a rear impact.
This helps to prevent the driver's and
front passenger’s heads from moving
backward and thus helps minimize neck
injuries.
OLM039011 OLM039012 HNF2041-1
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protects the occupants.
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets,
cushions or seat covers on the
seats while the seat warmer is in
operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
→
OLM039013
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OLM039015
WARNING
For proper operation of the occu-
pant classification system:
• Do not place any items cumula-
tively weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg)
in the seatback pocket or on the
seat.
• Do not hang onto the front pas-
senger seat.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off. In particular, the
driver must exercise extreme care
for the following types of passen-
gers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps to protect
the head and neck in the event of a colli-
sion.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
OLM039304N
OLM039017
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward from
the seatback.
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
OLM039018 OLM039019
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protect the occupants.
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects that could not be
accommodated in the cargo area.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the car is moving as this is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seatbacks. Doing this could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during sud-
den stops.
Safety features of your vehicle
143
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the
pocket between the rear seatback and
cushion, and insert the rear seat belt
webbing in the guide to prevent the
seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3.Lower the rear headrests to the lowest
position.
4.Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle. When you return the seatback
to its upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing on
the top of the seatback.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Pull the seatback
firmly until it clicks into place. Make
sure the seatback is locked in place.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
OLM039021 OLM039022
315
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger com-
partment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks to
the upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to their
proper position. Routing the seat belt
webbing through the rear seat belt
guides will help keep the belts from
being trapped behind or under the
seats.
CAUTION - Damaging rear
seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear seatback,
insert the buckle in the pocket
between the rear seatback and
cushion. Doing so can prevent the
buckle from being damaged by the
rear seatback.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and caus-
ing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be proper-
ly secured and may hit the front
seat occupants in a collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
and the parking brake is securely
applied whenever loading or
unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehicle
to move if the shift lever is inadver-
tently moved to another position.
Safety features of your vehicle
163
(Continued)
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-
ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild
soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in
a severe impact even if damage to
the assembly is not obvious. Belts
should not be worn with straps
twisted. Each belt assembly must
only be used by one occupant; it is
dangerous to put a belt around a
child being carried on the occu-
pant's lap.
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he/she
must be properly belted and the
seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twist-
ed.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
317
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned on, the
seat belt warning light and the seat belt
warning chime will operate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds. But if it is fastened
within the 6 seconds, the warning light
will blink till the 6 seconds and the warn-
ing chime will turn off immediately.
If the driver's seat belt is disconnected
after the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the seat belt warning light
will operate for approximately 6 seconds.
But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds,
the warning light will turn off immediately.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the seat belt warning light and
chime will operate for approximately 11
times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and
24 seconds off until the belt is fastened
or the vehicle speed decreases below 3
mph (5 km/h).
WARNING
No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
1GQA2083
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the safety
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too near your neck. The
shoulder portion should be adjusted so
that it lies across your chest and midway
over your shoulder nearest the door and
not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
B180A01NF-1
OLM039026
Front seat
319
Safety features of your vehicle
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear
seat 3-point system with combination
locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts are
installed in the rear seat positions to help
accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a combina-
tion retractor is also installed in the front
passenger seat position, it is strongly
recommended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER place
any infant restraint system in the front
seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the fea-
tures of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic lock-
ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat
belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab into the buckle. There will
be an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle. When not securing a
child restraint, the seat belt operates in
the same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips.
B200A02NF
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
Safety features of your vehicle
203
When the seat belt is fully extended from
the retractor to allow the installation of a
child restraint system, the seat belt oper-
ation changes to allow the belt to retract,
but not to extend (Automatic Locking
Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child
restraint system” in this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection for
seated passengers in either emergency
or automatic locking modes, it is recom-
mended that seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for improved
convenience. The automatic locking
function is intended to facilitate child
restraint installation. To convert from
the automatic locking feature to the
emergency locking operation mode,
allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully
retract.
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
CAUTION
Do NOT fold down the left portion of
the second row seat back when the
second row center seat belt is buck-
led. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the sec-
ond row center seat belt before
folding down the left portion of the
second row seat back. If the second
row center seat belt is buckled
when the left portion of the second
row seat back is folded down, dis-
tortion and damage to the top por-
tion of the seat back and seat belt
garnish may result, causing the
seat back to lock into the folded
down position.
B210A01NF-1
321
Safety features of your vehicle
3 Point rear center belt
To fasten the rear center belt
1. Extract the tongue plate from the hole
on the belt assembly cover and slowly
pull the tongue plates out from the
retractor.
2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
open end of the buckle (C) until an
audible “click" is heard, indicating the
latch is locked. Make sure the belt is
not twisted.
3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the
tongue plate (B) into the open end of
the buckle (D) until an audible “click” is
heard, indicating the latch is locked.
Make sure the belt is not twisted.
1KMB3441
OLM039056N
1KMB3443
CAUTION - Cargo
Be sure that the cargo is securely
loaded in the rear cargo area. Doing
not so may damage the rear center
safety belt in sudden stop or certain
collisions.
CAUTION
When using the rear center seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
Safety features of your vehicle
223
There will be an audible “click” when the
tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt is adjusted manu-
ally so that it fits snugly around your hips,
if you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let you
move around. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position. It
will also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
To unfasten the rear center belt
1.Press the release button on the buckle
(D) and remove the tongue plate (B)
from the buckle (D).
2.To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert a key or similar small rigid device
into the web release hole (C). Pull up
on the seat belt web (A) and allow the
webbing to retract automatically.
OLM039057N
WARNING
When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all tongue
plates and buckles. If any tongue
plate or buckle is not locked, it will
increase the chance of injury in the
event of collision.
(C)
(C)
(A)
(A)
323
Safety features of your vehicle
3.Insert the tongue plate (A) into the hole
on the belt assembly cover.
Stowing the rear seat belt
• The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the rear
seatback and cushion when not in use.
• Routing the seat belt webbing through
the rear seat belt guides will help keep
the belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats.
1KMB3453 OLM039029L OLM039031
CAUTION
When using the seat belt, use it
after taking it out of the guides.
If you pull the seat belt when it is
stored in the guides, it may damage
the guides and/or belt webbing.
Safety features of your vehicle
243
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions (or side collisions or
rollovers). The pre-tensioner seat belts
may be activated in crashes where the
frontal collision (or side collision or
rollover) is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions
(or side collisions or rollovers), the pre-
tensioner will activate and pull the seat
belt into tighter contact against the occu-
pant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
✽✽
NOTICE
The pre-tensioner will activate not only
in a frontal collision but also in a side
collision or rollover, if the vehicle is
equipped with a side or curtain air bag.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
OED030300
1LDE3100
325
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal collisions
(or side collisions or rollovers).
The pre-tensioners will not be activat-
ed if the seat belts are not being worn
at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not haz-
ardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light ( ) on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximately
6 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manu-
al.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts prop-
erly.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, please have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the pre-tensioner seat belt and SRS
air bag system as soon as possible.
Safety features of your vehicle
263
Seat belt precautions
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inadvertent
activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat
belt must be discarded, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Even with advanced air bags,
unbelted occupants can be severe-
ly injured by a deploying air bag.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant seating contained in this man-
ual.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
327
Safety features of your vehicle
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint laws.You
should be aware of the specific require-
ments in your state. Child and/or infant
seats must be properly placed and
installed in the rear seat. For more infor-
mation about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Before buying any
child restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213. The restraint must be appropriate
for your child's height and weight.
Check the label on the child restraint for
this information. Refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check if the belt
fits periodically. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of an
accident when they are restrained by a
proper restraint system in the rear seat. If
a larger child (over age 12) must be seat-
ed in the front seat, the child should be
securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
Safety features of your vehicle
283
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-
der belt assemblies whenever possible
according to specific recommendations
by their doctors. The lap portion of the
belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND
LOW AS POSSIBLE.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front and rear seats should be in
an upright position when the car is mov-
ing. A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the front and rear seats
are in a reclined position.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected peri-
odically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concern-
ing seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback has been folded down, be
careful not to damage the seat belt
webbing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle could possibly fail during
a collision or sudden stop, result-
ing in serious injury. If the webbing
or buckles are damaged, get them
replaced immediately.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snugged against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance an
occupant's hips will slide under the
lap belt causing serious internal
injuries. Also, the shoulder belt
may strike the occupant's neck.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
Safety features of your vehicle
303
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child and/or
infant safety seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. You
must use a commercially available child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or
by a LATCH system (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
(Continued)
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in the case of a sudden
stop or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger-side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
(Continued)
331
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child restraint
system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use of
the child restraint.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always proper-
ly position and secure children in
the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a
moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicle’s interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and only
lock under extreme or emergency condi-
tions (emergency lock mode), you must
manually change these seat belts to the
auto lock mode to secure a child
restraint.
CRS09
OUN026150
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, have
the system checked immediately
by your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint systems and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an accident.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
333
Safety features of your vehicle
Placing a passenger seat belt into
the auto lock mode
The use of the auto lock mode will
ensure that the normal movement of the
child in the vehicle does not cause the
seat belt to be pulled out and loosen the
firmness of its hold on the child restraint
system. To secure a child restraint sys-
tem, use the following procedure.
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat
belt all the way out. When the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is fully extend-
ed, it will shift the retractor to the “Auto
Lock” (child restraint) mode.
E2MS103005
OEN036102
OEN036101
Safety features of your vehicle
343
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the seat belt to retract and listen for an
audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.
This indicates that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the belt
as possible by pushing down on the
child restraint system while feeding the
shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt is
holding it firmly in place. If it is not,
release the seat belt and repeat steps
2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to
pull more of the seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press the
release button on the buckle and then
pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the
restraint and allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position, the
retractor will automatically switch
from the “Auto Lock” mode to the
emergency lock mode for normal
adult usage.
OEN036104OEN036103
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the pre-
ceding seven steps must be fol-
lowed each time a child restraint is
installed.
If the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your vehi-
cle turns or stops suddenly. A child
can be seriously injured or killed if
the child restraint is not properly
anchored to the car, including set-
ting the retractor to the Automatic
Locking mode.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat with
tether anchor system
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the back of the rear seatbacks.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under the
headrest and between the headrest
posts, otherwise route the tether strap
over the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the child restraint
seat.
OLM039033N
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
OLM039034
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers make
child restraint seats that are labeled as
LATCH or LATCH-compatible child
restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children". These
seats include two rigid or webbing
mounted attachments that connect to
two LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the need to
use seat belts to attach the child seat in
the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located on
the left and right rear seat backs to indi-
cate the position of the lower anchors for
child restraints.
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING - Child restraint
anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
OLM039035
OLM039036N
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
337
Safety features of your vehicle
LATCH anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are
located in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There is no
LATCH anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located between
the seatback and the seat cushion of the
rear seat left and right outboard seating
positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-
compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH child
restraint, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the LATCH and tether
anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat before
you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from
side to side. Also try to tug the seat for-
ward. Check to see if the anchors hold
the seat in place.
OLM039053N
WARNING
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
seriously injured or killed in a colli-
sion greatly increases.
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
LATCH lower anchors are only to
be used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions. Never
attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center seating
position. You may damage the
anchors or the anchors may fail
and break in a collision.
WARNING
When using the vehicle's "LATCH"
system to install a child restraint
system in the rear seat, all unused
vehicle rear seat belt metal latch
plates or tabs must be latched
securely in their seat belt buckles
and the seat belt webbing must be
retracted behind the child restraint
to prevent the child from reaching
and taking hold of unretracted seat
belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
or tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the child
in the child restraint.
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback reclined two positions
from the most upright latched posi-
tion.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the child-seat latch and LATCH
anchor during the installation.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OLM039301
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the seat belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and
severity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
339
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
a serious frontal collision or side colli-
sion (if equipped with a side air bag or
curtain air bag) in order to help protect
the occupants from serious physical
injury.
Also, the side and/or curtain air bags
inflate instantly in the event of a
rollover in order to help protect the
occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a col-
lision and its direction. These two fac-
tors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely inflate
and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly.The speed of air bag infla-
tion is a consequence of the extremely
short time in which a collision occurs
and the need to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-threat-
ening injuries in a severe collision and is
thus a necessary part of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also caus-
es the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances under
which contact with the steering
wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to the
steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possi-
ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm)
away). The front passengers
should always move their seats
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of collision, and passen-
gers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
Safety features of your vehicle
403
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though the smoke and powder are non-
toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult a doctor if the
symptom persists.
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it could cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage area’s
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it can
cause serious or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
341
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator (Front passenger’s seat only)
11. Occupant classification system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt buckle sensors
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
SRS air bag warning light should go out.
If any of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as soon as
possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
OLM039302NW7-147
Safety features of your vehicle
423
The front air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering wheel
and in the front passenger's panel above
the glove box. When the SRSCM detects
a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
B240B02L B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
343
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous pro-
jectile and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS air bag warn-
ing light does not illuminate, con-
tinuously remains on after illumi-
nating for about 6 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, or after the
engine is started, or comes on
while driving, the SRS is not
working properly. If this occurs,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warn-
ing light to illuminate.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
Occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-
pant classification system in the front
passenger's seat.
The occupant classification system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The driver's front air bag is not affected
or controlled by the occupant classifica-
tion system.
Main components of occupant
classification system
• A detection device located within the
front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag sys-
tems should be activated or deactivat-
ed.
• A indicator light located on the instru-
ment panel which illuminates the
words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicating the front passenger air bag
system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag indicator
light is interconnected with the occu-
pant classification system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by
a person that the system determines to
be of adult size, and he/she sits properly
(sitting upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the
floor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator will turn off and the front pas-
senger's air bag will be able to inflate, if
necessary, in frontal crashes.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator on the center facia panel.
This system detects the conditions 1~4
in the following table and activates or
deactivates the front passenger air bag
based on these conditions.
OLM039052N
345
Safety features of your vehicle
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person's legs comfort-
ably extended, feet on the floor, and
wearing the seat belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air bag
and the seat belt.
• The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which can
defect the detection system. These
include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger weight
on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
*
1
: If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by a child who is not in a CRS,
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator may or may not be on. This is a
normal condition. But to maximize
safety, do not allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat.
*
2
: Never install a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
WARNING
Riding in an improper position or
placing weight or an active elec-
tronic device (ex. Laptop computer,
navigation etc..) on the front pas-
senger's seat when it is unoccu-
pied by a passenger adversely
affects the occupant classification
system (OCS).
(Continued)
Condition
detected by the
occupant classi-
fication system
1. Adult or child*
1
2. Child restraint
system*
2
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a
malfunction in
the system
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
"PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF"
indicator light
SRS warning
light
Front passen-
ger air bag
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Side air bag
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Curtain air bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
Safety features of your vehicle
463
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the door or center
console.
- Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
B990A08O
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load or an
active electronic device (ex.
Laptop computer, navigation
etc..) on the front passenger seat.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OVQ036014N
- Never place feet on the front pas-
senger seatback.
(Continued)
347
Safety features of your vehicle
When an adult is seated in the front pas-
senger seat, if the “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” indicator is on, turn the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position and ask
the passenger to sit properly (sitting
upright with the seat back in an upright
position, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor).
Restart the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow the
system to detect the person and to
enable the passenger air bag.
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-
cator is still on, ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat.
✽✽
NOTICE
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant classification
sensor will then classify the front pas-
senger after several more seconds.
B990A01O
WARNING
Do not allow an adult passenger to
ride in the front seat when the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator is illuminated because the air
bag will not deploy in the event of a
crash. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator remains illuminated
after the adult passenger reposi-
tions themselves properly and the
car is restarted, it is recommended
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's front
air bag will not deploy.
Front seat passengers must stay
properly seated to avoid serious
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING
Do not put a heavy load or an active
electronic device (ex. Laptop com-
puter, navigation etc..) on the front
passenger seat. Do not place any
items under the front passenger
seat. Any of these could interfere
with proper sensor operation.
Proper position
Safety features of your vehicle
483
(Continued)
• Accident statistics show that chil-
dren are safer if they are
restrained in the rear, as opposed
to the front seat. It is recommend-
ed that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat,
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child rid-
ing in a booster seat.
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag imme-
diately after deployment.
• The occupant classification sys-
tem may not work properly if
water, coffee or any other liquid
including rain gets on the seat.
Keep the front seat dry at all
times.
• Do not place an electronic device
such as a laptop computer on the
front passenger seat. Its elec-
tronic field may cause the OCS to
switch to the "on" condition and
thus allow the passenger air bag
to deploy needlessly in a colli-
sion, increasing your repair
costs.
(Continued)
• If the front passenger seat is
occupied by a child who is not in
a CRS, the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator may or may
not be on and the passenger air
bag may or may not deploy in a
collision. Have the child move to a
rear seat to increase their safety.
• Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place any-
thing on or attach anything such
as a blanket or seat heater to the
front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant
classification system.
• Do not place sharp objects on the
front passenger seat. These may
damage the occupant classifica-
tion system, if they puncture the
seat cushion.
• Do not use accessory seat cov-
ers on the front seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, never install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger's seat. A deploying air
bag can forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injuries or
death. Any child age 12 and
under should ride in the rear seat.
Children too large for child
restraints should use the avail-
able lap/shoulder belts. No mat-
ter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained
in the rear seat.
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's seat
is occupied by an adult and
he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor), have
that person sit in the rear seat.
(Continued)
349
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions. The
indications of the system's presence are
the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the
air bag pad cover in the steering wheel
and the passenger's side front panel pad
above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-
er information about the driver's and front
passenger's seat belt usage and impact
severity.
OLM039037
Driver’s front air bag
WARNING
If the occupant classification sys-
tem is not working properly, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate
because the passenger's front air
bag is connected with the occupant
classification system. If there is a
malfunction of the occupant classi-
fication system, the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator will not
illuminate and the passenger's
front air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's
seat. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, remains illuminated after
approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the occupant classification system
and the SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
OLM039038
Passenger’s front air bag
Safety features of your vehicle
503
The seat belt buckle sensors determine if
the driver and front passenger's seat
belts are fastened.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the air bag inflation with two lev-
els. A first stage level is provided for mod-
erate-severity impacts. A second stage
level is provided for more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is designed
to help reduce the injury of children sit-
ting close to the instrument panel in low
speed collisions. However, children are
safer if they are restraint in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity and seat
belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control
Module) controls the air bag inflation.
Failure to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant classification system in
the front passenger's seat. The occupant
classification system detects the pres-
ence of a passenger in the front passen-
ger's seat and will turn off the front pas-
senger's air bag under certain condi-
tions. For more detail, see "Occupant
classification system" in this section.
WARNING
If an occupant classification sys-
tem is not working properly, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate
because the SRS air bag warning
light is connected with the occu-
pant classification system. If the
SRS air bag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position,
remains illuminated after approxi-
mately 6 seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position,
or if it illuminates while the vehicle
is being driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the
advanced SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not place any objects under-
neath the front seats as they could
interfere with the occupant classifi-
cation system.
351
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Be sure to read information about the
SRS on the labels provided on the sun
visor.
• Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-
vide enhanced occupant protection in
frontal crashes. Front air bags are not
intended to deploy in collisions in
which protection can be provided by
the pre-tensioner seat belt.
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned driver and passengers
can be severely injured by inflat-
ing air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to ride
in the front seat when the “PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator
is illuminated, because the air
bag will not deploy in the event of
a moderate or severe frontal
crash.
(Continued)
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with con-
siderable force and in the blink of
an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-
pants in proper position to obtain
maximum benefit from the air bag.
Even with advanced air bags,
improperly and unbelted occupants
can be severely injured when the
air bag inflates. Always follow the
precautions about seat belts, air
bags and occupant safety con-
tained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side air bags can injure
occupants improperly positioned
in the front seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
If you are considering modification
of your vehicle due to a disability,
please contact the Hyundai
Customer Assistance Center at 1-
800-633-5151.
Safety features of your vehicle
523
OEP036096N
OVQ036018N
1VQA2091
Rear impact
Side impact
Rollover
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
• Never place covers, blankets or
seat warmers on the passenger
seat as these may interfere with
the occupant classification sys-
tem.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated while the
vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag imme-
diately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
(Continued)
353
Safety features of your vehicle
Side impact air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
(Continued)
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, do not install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger seat position. A child
restraint system must never be
placed in the front seat.The infant
or child could be severely injured
or killed by an air bag deployment
in case of an accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
OXM039054
OLM039039
Safety features of your vehicle
543
• The side impact air bags are designed
to deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
• The side impact air bags do not only
deploy on the side of the impact but
also on the opposite side.
• Also, both sides of the side impact air
bags deploy in certain rollover situa-
tions.
• The side impact air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact or
rollover situations.
(Continued)
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition switch
is on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer because your
vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags and an occupant
classification system.
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is supple-
mental to the driver's and the pas-
senger's seat belt systems and is
not a substitute for them.
Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times while the vehicle
is in motion. The air bags deploy
only in certain side impact or
rollover conditions severe enough
to cause significant injury to the
vehicle occupants.
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passen-
ger's arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
(Continued)
355
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
• The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact colli-
sions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and point of impact.
• The curtain air bags do not only deploy
on the side of the impact but also on
the opposite side.
• Also, the both sides of the curtain air
bags deploy in certain rollover situa-
tions.
• The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain air
bags to provide the best protec-
tion, front seat occupants and
outboard rear occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to
position the child restraint sys-
tem as far away from the door
side as possible, and secure the
child restraint system in a locked
position.
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and cur-
tain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above instruc-
tions can result in injury or death to
the vehicle occupants in an acci-
dent.
OXM039055
OXM039056
Safety features of your vehicle
563
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts. In other words, just because
your vehicle is damaged and even if it
is totally unusable, don’t be surprised
that the air bags did not inflate.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side impact sensor
OLM039040N/OLM039041/OLM039042/OLM039043/OLM039044
1
2 3
4
357
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
1VQA2084
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body, front door
and B pillars where side collision
sensors are installed. Have the
vehicle checked and repaired by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards (or side
step or running board) or replac-
ing a bumper (or front door) with
non-genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicles collision and
air bag deployment performance.
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with side
and curtain air bag, set the ignition
switch to OFF or ACC position
when the vehicle is being towed.
The side and curtain air bag may
deploy when the ignitions is ON,
and the rollover sensor detects the
situation as a rollover.
Safety features of your vehicle
583
Side impact and curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Also, the side impact and curtain air bags
are designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side impact and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate only in
side impact collisions or rollovers. But
they may inflate in other type of collisions
or similar rollover situations, including
when the vehicle is tilted such as being
towed if the side impact sensors or
rollover sensor detect a sufficient impact
or rollover.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads,
the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully
on unimproved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
1VQA2086
OVQ036018N
OUN026090
359
Safety features of your vehicle
• Air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear collisions, because occupants are
moved backward by the force of the
impact. In this case, inflated air bags
would not be able to provide any addi-
tional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
1VQA2089OVQ036018NOUN036087
Safety features of your vehicle
603
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly reduced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
However, if equipped with side impact
and curtain air bags, the air bags may
inflate in a rollover, when it is detected
by the rollover sensor.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092
361
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel, the front
passenger's panel, front seats and roof
rails must be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of
the SRS system may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• Not only the modification of the
parts where the SRS sensors are
but also the modification of other
parts of the vehicle may affect the
SRS performance and lead to
possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
•
No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel,
and the front passenger's panel
above the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe enough
to cause the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they must
be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorized HYUNDAI
dealer knows these precautions
and can give you the necessary
information. Failure to follow these
precautions and procedures could
increase the risk of personal
injury.
• If your vehicle was flooded and
has soaked carpeting or water on
the floor, you shouldn't try to
start the engine; have the car
towed to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side air bag covers could interfere with
the proper operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying air
bag, strike the interior structure or
be thrown from the vehicle result-
ing in serious injury or death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and your feet on the
floor.
• Always have the ignition OFF in
an abnormal situation.The side air
bags may inflate if the vehicle is
tilted such as when being towed
because the rollover sensor
detects it as a rollover situation.
• Be careful not to cause impact to
the doors when the ignition is ON.
The air bags may inflate.
363
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert
the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
OLM039058N/OLM039050N/OLM039051
4
Keys / 4-3
Remote keyless entry / 4-4
Theft-alarm system / 4-7
Door locks / 4-9
Tailgate / 4-13
Windows / 4-15
Hood / 4-19
Fuel filler lid / 4-21
Panorama sunroof / 4-24
Steering wheel / 4-28
Mirrors / 4-30
Instrument cluster / 4-33
Rearview camera / 4-49
Hazard warning flasher / 4-49
Lighting / 4-50
Wipers and washers / 4-54
Interior light / 4-58
Defroster / 4-60
Manual climate control system / 4-62
Automatic climate control system / 4-71
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-78
Storage compartment / 4-81
Features of your vehicle
Interior features / 4-83
Exterior features / 4-89
Audio system / 4-90
Features of your vehicle
4
43
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code number is stamped on the
bar code tag attached to the key set.
Should you lose your keys, this number
will enable an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er to duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the bar code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the code number and
keep it in a safe place (not in the vehicle).
Key operations
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
KEYS
OUN046100L
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dan-
gerous even if the key is not in the
ignition switch. Children copy
adults and they could place the key
in the ignition switch. The ignition
key would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in serious
bodily injury or even death. Never
leave the keys in your vehicle with
unsupervised children.
OUN026060
WARNING
Use only HYUNDAI original parts
for the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens, the
starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
Features of your vehicle
44
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Lock (1)
All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the
lock button is pressed.
If all doors (and tailgate) are closed, the
hazard warning lights will blink once to
indicate that all doors (and tailgate) are
locked.
The chime sounds once if the lock button
is pressed once more within 4 seconds.
However, if any door (or tailgate) remains
open, the hazard warning lights and the
chime will not operate. If all doors (and
tailgate) are closed after the lock button
is pressed, the hazard warning lights
blink.
Unlock (2)
Driver's door is unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once. The hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the driver's door is unlocked.
All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if
the unlock button is pressed once more
within 4 seconds. The hazard warning
lights will blink twice again to indicate
that all doors (and tailgate) are unlocked.
After depressing this button, the doors
(and tailgate) will be locked automatical-
ly unless you open any door within 30
seconds.
Alarm (3)
The horn sounds and hazard warning
lights flash for about 30 seconds if this
button is pressed. To stop the horn and
lights, press any button on the transmit-
ter.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
OLM049002N
45
Features of your vehicle
Transmitter precautions
✽✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
64
Battery replacement
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery
which will normally last for several years.
When replacement is necessary, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the transmitter center
cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery positive “+” sym-
bol faces up as indicated in the illus-
tration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmit-
ter reprogramming.
CAUTION
• The keyless entry system trans-
mitter is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, howev-
er it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use your
transmitter or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunc-
tion. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
OLM049200
47
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorized entry into the
car. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm
the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-
tion switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)
and engine hood are closed and
latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of
the keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, the
hazard warning lights will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed.
If any door (or tailgate) or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning lights
and the chime will not operate and the
theft-alarm will not arm. If all doors (and
tailgate) and engine hood are closed
after the lock button is pressed, the haz-
ard warning lights blink once.
The system can also be armed by lock-
ing the doors with the key from the front
doors; however, the hazard warning
lights will not blink using this method.
✽✽
NOTICE
The theft-alarm system by the key can
be deactivated by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining pas-
senger(s) leave the vehicle. If any
door (or tailgate) or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after the
system enters the armed stage, the
system is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
Features of your vehicle
84
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using the ignition key or transmitter.
• The tailgate is opened without using
the transmitter.
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 27 seconds, and repeat
the horn 3 times unless the system is dis-
armed. To turn off the system, unlock the
doors with the ignition key or transmitter.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when the
doors (and tailgate) are unlocked with the
transmitter or the ignition key.
After depressing the unlock button, the
hazard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait for
30 seconds. Then the system will be
disarmed. (if equipped)
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and should only be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
49
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock the door with a key, all vehi-
cle doors will lock automatically.
• From the driver’s door, turn the key to
the right once to unlock the driver’s
door and once more within 4 seconds
to unlock all doors.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
❈ If your vehicle is equipped with the
remote keyless entry system, there is
no key lock on the front passenger’s
door.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
• To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) or central
door lock switch (2
)
to the “Lock” posi-
tion and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors
will lock automatically.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key, engage
the parking brake, close all windows
and lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
DOOR LOCKS
OLM049008
Lock
Unlock
OLM049009
Features of your vehicle
104
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock but-
ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s
(or front passenger’s) door is pulled
when the door lock button is in lock
position, the button is unlocked and
door opens. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is open.
With central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central door
lock switch.
OLM049010
Lock
Unlock
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate.
OLM049011
Driver’s door
OLM049209N
Passenger’s door
411
Features of your vehicle
• When pushing down on the front por-
tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear por-
tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is opened, the doors will
not lock even though the front portion
(1) of central door lock switch is
pressed.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehi-
cle is in motion to prevent acci-
dental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
Features of your vehicle
124
Impact sensing door unlock
system (if equipped)
In the event of air bag deployment result-
ing from a vehicle impact, all doors will
automatically unlock.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
• All doors will be automatically locked
when shifting the transaxle shift lever
out of P (Park) with engine is running.
• All doors will be automatically unlocked
when shifting the transaxle shift lever
into P (Park) with engine is running.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the lock
( ) position. When the child safety
lock is in the lock position, the rear
door will not open even though the
inner door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle.
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (1) until the rear door
child safety lock is unlocked (
➡
).
OLM049012
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To pre-
vent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
413
Features of your vehicle
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter or central door
lock switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle switch and
pulling the handle up.
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work proper-
ly due to freezing conditions.
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that
the tailgate is securely latched.
TAILGATE
OLM049013 OLM049014
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tail-
gate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle which can
cause serious injury or death to
vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional out-
side air comes into the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
144
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-
gency tailgate safety release lever locat-
ed on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment, if the lever is
pushed, the tailgate latch mechanism is
released and the tailgate is opened by
pushing rearward.
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in
this vehicle and how to open the
tailgate if you are accidentally
locked in the luggage compart-
ment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use extreme cau-
tion, especially while the vehicle
is in motion.
OLM049015
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
415
Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up/down*
(Driver’s window)
(7) Power window lock switch
* : if equipped
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
WINDOWS
OLM049020N
Features of your vehicle
164
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door's window. The driv-
er has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of passenger
windows. The power windows can be
operated for approximately 30 seconds
after the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated within the
30 second period after the ignition key
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open) position,
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise
is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the fol-
lowing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experi-
ence the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the win-
dows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent posi-
tion (6) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up the switch momentarily
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
OLM049021 OLM049022
417
Features of your vehicle
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
(Driver's window)
Depressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is released.
To stop the window at the desired position
while the window is in operation, pull up or
depress and release the switch to the
opposite direction of the movement.
If the power window is not operated cor-
rectly, the automatic power window system
must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Close driver’s window and continue
pulling up on driver’s power window
switch for at least 1 second after the win-
dow is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30
cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway posi-
tion on the power window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
OUN026013OLM049023
Features of your vehicle
184
Power window lock button
• The driver can disable the power win-
dow switches on the passenger doors
by depressing the power window lock
switch located on the driver’s door to
LOCK (pressed).
• When the power window lock switch
is ON, the driver’s master control
cannot operate the passenger door
power windows.
OLM049024
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the ignition key in
the vehicle.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend any head or arms
outside through the window
opening while driving.
419
Features of your vehicle
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift
the hood (2).
3.Pull out the support rod from the
engine room.
4.Hold the hood open with the support
rod.
HOOD
OLM049025
OLM049026 OLM049027
WARNING - Hot parts
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The rubber will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is
hot.
Features of your vehicle
204
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-
lowing:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft. (30
cm) above the closed position and let
it drop. Make sure that it locks into
place.
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood in the raised position, as
vision is obstructed and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
421
Features of your vehicle
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel
filler lid opener lever.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the lid to break the ice
and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid.
If necessary, spray around the lid with
an approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle
to a warm place and allow the ice to
melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel
filler lid opener up.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel filler
cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-
ly making sure that it is securely
closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OSA047022
OLM049028
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-
erwise the Check Engine light
will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
Features of your vehicle
224
(Continued)
Use only approved portable plas-
tic fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-
line source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling dan-
gers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling, note the loca-
tion of the Emergency Gasoline
Shut-Off, if available, at the gas
station facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
423
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart-
ment or 911. Follow any safety
instructions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
Features of your vehicle
244
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a rain-
storm be sure to wipe off any water
that is on the sunroof before operating
it.
✽✽
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the
slide position but can be slid while in a
tilt position.
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM049030
CAUTION
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sunroof
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or roller
blind while driving. This could
result in loss of control and an
accident that may cause death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• If you would like to carry items on
the roof rack using a cross bar,
do not operate the sunroof.
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, do not load heavy items
above the sunroof or glass roof.
• All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce serious or fatal injuries
for all occupants in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
WARNING
Do not allow children operate the
sunroof. Closing a sunroof on
someone can cause serious injury,
and in some cases, even death.
425
Features of your vehicle
Sliding the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
To open the sunroof (manual slide fea-
ture), pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
To close the sunroof (manual slide fea-
ture), push or pull the sunroof control
lever with safety switch (1) forward or
downward to the first detent position.
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will slide open
automatically open all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will automatically
close all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detected
while the sunroof is closing automatically, it
will reverse the direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work if
a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass
and the sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and objects are
away from the sunroof before closing it.
OLM049031 OXM049029
WARNING
• Never activate the auto reverse
function intentionally with any of
your body parts.
• The auto reverse function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the sunroof
fully closes.
Features of your vehicle
264
Tilting the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
To open the sunroof (manual feature),
push the sunroof control lever upward
until the sunroof moves to the desired
position.
To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof
lever downward until the sunroof moves
to the desired position.
Roller blind
The roller blinds are installed inside of
the sunroof and glass roof.
Open or close it manually when you need
to.
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
✽✽
NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on the
blind because of its material character-
istic.
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed by
a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof
while driving.
• Make sure your hands and head
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be dam-
aged.
• Do not leave the roller blind
closed while the sunroof is
opened.
OXM049031
OLM049032
427
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, you must reset
your sunroof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Open the roller blind.
3. Close the sunroof.
4. Release the sunroof control lever.
5. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close (about 10 sec-
onds) until the sunroof is moved a lit-
tle. Then, release the lever.
6. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sun-
roof operates as follows;
TILT OPEN → SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof sys-
tem has been reset.
Features of your vehicle
284
Electronic power steering
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is con-
trolled by power steering control unit
which sense the steering wheel torque,
steering wheel position and vehicle
speed to command the motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for the better control of the
steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steer-
ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur dur-
ing normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not illumi-
nate.
• The steering wheel becomes heavier
after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condi-
tion.
• Click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed or in cold weather.
• The steering effort can suddenly
increase, if the operation of EPS sys-
tem is stopped to prevent serious acci-
dents when the malfunction of EPS
system is detected by self-diagnosis.
Tilt steering
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle (if
equipped).
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle and height
of steering wheel while driving.
You may lose your steering con-
trol and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
429
Features of your vehicle
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock-release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and the desired position (if equipped)
(3), then pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure
to adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position before driving.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
OLM049033L
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
OLM049034
Features of your vehicle
304
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatical-
ly controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automati-
cally controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision through
the rear window.
OLM049035
Day
Night
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liq-
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-
ing.
431
Features of your vehicle
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
OLM049037L
Indicator
Sensor
Rearview display mirror
(if equipped)
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
Features of your vehicle
324
Remote control
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, push
the switch (1) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point on the mirror
adjustment control to position the select-
ed mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the switch into neu-
tral (center) position to prevent the inad-
vertent adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of the mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OLM049039 OLM049042
433
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Shift position indicator
6. Fuel gauge
7. Odometer/Trip computer*
8. Warning and indicator lights
* : if equipped
OLM049051N
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in the next pages.
Features of your vehicle
344
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumination
control button to adjust the brightness of
the instrument panel illumination.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in miles
per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approxi-
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
When the door is open, or if the engine is
not started within 1 minute, the tachome-
ter pointer may move slightly in ON posi-
tion with the engine OFF. This movement
is normal and will not affect the accuracy
of the tachometer once the engine is run-
ning.
OLM049052 OLM049056OLM049054N
435
Features of your vehicle
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheat-
ing that may damage the engine.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine dam-
age.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OLM049057
Features of your vehicle
364
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which will illumi-
nate when the fuel tank is near empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
including odometer, tripmeter, distance
to empty, average fuel consumption,
average speed, driving time and ECO
ON/OFF mode (if equipped) on the dis-
play when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. All stored driving information
(except odometer and distance to empty)
is reset if the battery is disconnected.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
E level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
OLM049058 OLM049059
437
Features of your vehicle
The odometer is always displayed until
the display is turned off.
Push the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-
ond to select tripmeter, distance to
empty, average fuel consumption, aver-
age speed, driving time and ECO
ON/OFF mode* function as follows:
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
Tripmeter
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 miles (0.0 to 999.9 km).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter is being dis-
played, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
OLM049060N OLM049061N
Tripmeter
Driving time
ECO ON/OFF mode*
Distance to empty
Average fuel consumption
Average speed
* : if equipped
Features of your vehicle
384
Distance to empty
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 30 miles (50
km), “----” will be displayed and the dis-
tance to empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 30 to
990 miles (50 to 990 km).
Average fuel consumption
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average con-
sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 0.03 miles (50 m).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel consump-
tion is being displayed, clears the average
fuel consumption to zero (--.-).
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6
liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty values may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an esti-
mate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
OLM049062N OLM049064N
439
Features of your vehicle
Average speed
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is
being displayed, clears the average
speed to zero (---).
Driving time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(0:00).
ECO ON/OFF mode (if equipped)
You can turn the ECO indicator on/off on
the instrument cluster in this mode.
If you push the TRIP button more than 1
second in the ECO ON mode, ECO OFF
is displayed in the screen and the ECO
indicator turns off.
If you want to display the ECO indicator
again, press the TRIP button more than 1
second in the ECO OFF mode and then
ECO ON mode is displayed in the
screen.
When you press the TRIP button less
than 1 second in the ECO mode, the
mode is changed to odometer.
OLM049066N OLM049067N OLM049068N
Features of your vehicle
404
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
ECO indicator (if equipped)
The ECO indicator is a system that
informs you to drive economically.
It is displayed if you drive fuel efficiently
to help you improve fuel efficiency.
• The ECO indicator (green) will turn on
when you are driving fuel efficiently in
the ECO ON mode.
If you don't want the indicator dis-
played, you can turn the ECO ON
mode to OFF mode by pressing the
TRIP button.
As per ECO ON/OFF Mode operation,
refer to the previous page.
• The fuel-efficiency can be changed by
the driver's driving habit and road con-
dition.
• It doesn't work at the condition which
doesn't meet economical driving such
as P (Park), N (Neutral) and R
(Reverse) or sports mode.
Air bag warning light
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the AIR BAG
warning light does not come on, or con-
tinuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or start-
ed the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ECO
WARNING
Don't keep watching the indicator
while driving. It will distract you
while driving and cause an acci-
dent that results in severe personal
injury.
441
Features of your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a malfunction with the
ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but with-
out the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time while driving, your vehicle
may have a malfunction with ABS and
EBD system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS warning
light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease. In this
case, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If both ABS and Brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally. So you may experience
an unexpected and dangerous situ-
ation during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
424
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning light
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released while engine is run-
ning.
The parking brake warning chime will
sound to remind you that the parking
brake is applied when you are driving
above 6 mph (10 km/h). Always release
the parking brake before you drive.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have the vehicle towed to any author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-
tem inspection and necessary repairs.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-
nal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear
for additional engine braking and stop the
car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
Seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON, regardless of belt fastening.
For details, refer to the seat belt on chap-
ter 3.
Turn signal indicator
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consult-
ed for repairs.
This indicator also blinks when the haz-
ard warning switch is turned on.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired imme-
diately by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
443
Features of your vehicle
Light on indicator
The indicator illuminates when the tail
lights or headlights are ON.
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights are ON.
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer before
the car is driven again.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped imme-
diately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
Features of your vehicle
444
Shift pattern indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift position is selected.
Manual transaxle shift
indicator (if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th gear).
✽✽
NOTICE
When the system is not working proper-
ly, up & down arrow indicator and Gear
are not displayed.
Charging system warning
light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem
as soon as possible.
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the igni-
tion switch in any position.
Tailgate open warning light
This warning light illuminates when the
tailgate is not closed securely with the
ignition switch in any position.
445
Features of your vehicle
Low fuel level warning light
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
Malfunction indicator (MIL)
(check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-
cates that a potential malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the emis-
sion control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, take your vehicle to your near-
est authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.
CAUTION
• Prolonged driving with the
Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
•
If the
Emission
Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power.
Have the Engine Control System
inspected as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Features of your vehicle
464
ESC indicator (Electronic
Stability Control)
(if equipped)
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions and under normal
driving conditions, the ESC indicator will
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-
tion condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
But, if the ESC system malfunctions the
indicator illuminates and stays on. Take
your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
ESC OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated.
DBC (Downhill brake con-
trol) indicator (if equipped)
The DBC indicator will illuminate when
the DBC button is pressed and the sys-
tem is on.
When driving down a steep hill at a
speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the DBC
will operate and the DBC indicator will
blink to indicate the DBC is operating.
If the red indicator illuminates, the DBC
system may have malfunctioned. Take
your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
AWD system warning light
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the AWD indicator will illu-
minate and then go off in a few seconds.
If the AWD system warning light
illuminates, this indicates that there is a
malfunction in the AWD system. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
AWD LOCK indicator
(if equipped)
The AWD LOCK indicator light is illumi-
nated when the AWD LOCK button is
pushed. The purpose of this AWD LOCK
mode is to increase the drive power
when driving on dry road surfaces, wet
pavement, snow-covered roads and/or
off-road. The AWD LOCK indicator light
is turned off by pushing the button again.
CAUTION
Do not use AWD LOCK mode on dry
paved roads or highway, it can
cause noise, vibration or damage of
AWD related parts.
447
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Low tire pres-
sure
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on low pressure
tires will cause the tires to overheat
and fail.
Low tire pressure telltale
The low tire pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
If the warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after coming on
for about 3 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not
working properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate if
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible. If
the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing, reduce vehicle speed immediately
and stop the vehicle. Avoid hard braking
and overcorrecting at the steering wheel.
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
The TPMS is not a replacement for nor-
mal tire maintenance. Tire inflation
should be checked on a regular basis.
Refer to the TPMS instructions and warn-
ings in section 5.
Engine coolant
temperature warning light
The warning light illuminates if the tem-
perature of the engine coolant is above
248±5.4°F (120±3°C).
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in section 6.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine coolant temperature warn-
ing light illuminates, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the engine.
Electronic power steering
(EPS) system warning light
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out after the engine is
started.
This light also comes on when the EPS
has some troubles. If it comes on while
driving, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
EPS
Features of your vehicle
484
Cruise indicator
CRUISE indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated when the
cruise control ON-OFF button on the
steering wheel is pushed.
The indicator light turns off when the
cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed
again. For more information about the
use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise
control system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise function switch (SET- or RES+) is
ON.
The cruise SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illuminated when
the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+)
is pushed. The cruise SET indicator light
does not illuminate when the cruise con-
trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the
system is disengaged.
Key reminder warning chime
If the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
is to prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
SET
CRUISE
449
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through the
rearview display mirror while backing-up.
The rearview camera may be turned off by
pressing the ON/OFF button when the
rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press the
ON/OFF button again when the ignition
switch is on and the shift lever in R
(Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on
automatically whenever the ignition switch
is turned off and on again.
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition
switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the inside/outside rearview
mirror and the area behind the
vehicle before and while backing
up because there is a dead zone
that can't see through the cam-
era.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with for-
eign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OLM049084
OLM049081/OLM049082/OLM049083N
■ Type B
■ Type A
Rear view display
Rear view display
Features of your vehicle
504
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the exterior lights when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, per-
form the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights) remain
on for approximately 20 minutes after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 30 sec-
onds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmit-
ter twice or turning off the light switch
from the headlight or Auto light position.
Headlight welcome function
When the headlight switch is in the ON
position or in the AUTO position and all
doors (and tailgate) are closed and
locked, if you press the door unlock but-
ton on the transmitter, the headlight will
come on for about 15 seconds.
To turn off the headlight immediately, do
one of the following:
• Press the door lock button.
• Press the unlock button twice within 4
seconds.
• Press the unlock button once more
after 4 seconds.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
LIGHTING
OXM049110
451
Features of your vehicle
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (1st position), the tail, posi-
tion, license and instrument panel lights
will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position), the head, tail,
position, license and instrument panel
lights will turn ON.
✽✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turn ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
OAM049041 OAM049042 OLM049328
Features of your vehicle
524
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
CAUTION
• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the
front windshield, the Auto light
system may not work properly.
OAM049044 OAM049043
453
Features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). The green arrow indicators on the
instrument panel indicate which turn sig-
nal is operating. They will self-cancel
after a turn is completed. If the indicator
continues to flash after a turn, manually
return the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly for less than 0.5 second and then
release it. The lane change signals will
blink 3 times.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, a bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn
on when fog light switch (1) is turned to
ON after the headlights (low beam) are
turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
to OFF.
OAM049046
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
OAM049045
Features of your vehicle
544
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – AUTO control wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent or Auto control wipe
time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· ON – Continuous wipe
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer
(if equipped)
OAM049100N/OAM049048N
455
Features of your vehicle
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, move
the lever to this (MIST) position
and release it. The wipers will
operate continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use this
mode in a light rain or mist. To vary
the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob(1).
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When you operate the wipers, if your
vehicle has a problem in any part of
the wiper operation system, the wiper
may operate in the LO mode regard-
less of the wiper switch position. In
this case, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• When the ignition key is removed, the
wiper blade sometimes may move to
properly position slightly for reducing
the deterioration of the windshield
wipers.
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to OFF posi-
tion when the wiper is not in use.
OAM049101N OXM049123
Rain sensor
Features of your vehicle
564
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windshield wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-
tion in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windshield glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windshield glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind-
shield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the OFF position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the OFF
position. Otherwise, wipers may
operate and ice may damage the
windshield wiper blades. Always
remove all snow and ice and defrost
the windshield properly prior to
operating the windshield wipers.
OAM049102N
457
Features of your vehicle
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to the desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you to spray
rear washer fluid and to run the rear
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper
operation will continue until you release
the lever.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windshield and obscure your
vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
OAM049103N OXM049125
Features of your vehicle
584
Map lamp
Push the lens to turn the map lamp on or
off.
• ON : The light (with room lamp)
stays on at all times.
• DOOR : The light (with room lamp)
comes on when any door
(except tailgate) is opened
regardless of the ignition switch
position. When doors (except
tailgate) are unlocked by the
transmitter, the light (with room
lamp) comes on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds as long as
any door (except tailgate) is not
opened.
Also, the light (with room lamp)
goes out gradually after approxi-
mately 30 seconds if the door
(except tailgate) is closed.
However, if the ignition switch is
ON or all doors (except tailgate)
are locked, the light will turn off
immediately.
If a door (except tailgate) is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ACC or LOCK position, the
light (with room lamp) stays on for
about 20 minutes. However, if a
door (except tailgate) is opened
with the ignition switch in the ON
position, the light (with room
lamp) stays on continuously.
• OFF : The light (only map lamp) stays
off at all times.
INTERIOR LIGHT
OLM049100
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
459
Features of your vehicle
Room lamp
The room lamp operates according to the
map lamp main switch position.
• ON : The light (room lamp) stays on at
all times regardless of the map
lamp main switch position.
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
The light comes on or off when the tail-
gate is opened or closed.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
The parking lights or headlights must be
ON for the glove box lamp to function.
OLM049101 OLM049103 OLM049102
Features of your vehicle
604
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
• : The lamp will turn on if this but-
ton is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this but-
ton is pressed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Turn off the lamp before return the sun-
visor to its original position.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
rear window, while the engine is running.
OLM049105
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
DEFROSTER
OLM049109
461
Features of your vehicle
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the out-
side rearview mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
Front windshield deicer
(if equipped)
To activate the front windshield deicer,
press the front windshield deicer button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the front windshield
deicer button illuminates when the deicer
is ON.
The front windshield deicer automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the deicer, press the front
windshield deicer button again.
OLM049104
Features of your vehicle
624
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM049111
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. MAX A/C mode button
4. Temperature control knob
5. Air conditioning button
6. Mode selection button
7. Air intake control button
463
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
OLM049120
Features of your vehicle
644
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Six symbols
are used to represent MAX A/C, Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost
air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster.
MAX A/C-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OLM049112
465
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumb-
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position. To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flow-
ing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the pas-
senger compartment, turn the knob to
the right position for warm and hot air or
left position for cooler air.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
OLM049115 OLM049116OLM049114
Features of your vehicle
664
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button does not illuminates
when the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessive-
ly dry air in the passenger compart-
ment.
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
467
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the mode selection knob to the
“0” position turns off the fan.
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-
tioning system on (indicator light will illu-
minate). Push the button again to turn the
air conditioning system off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
OLM049117
OLM049118
Features of your vehicle
684
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the car through the ventilation
system, temporarily set the air intake
control to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant which does not dam-
age the ozone layer.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, set the mode control to
the MAX A/C position, then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be run
with the windows closed.
469
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehi-
cle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristics.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
704
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent air conditioner
filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
It is important when servicing the air
conditioning system that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the com-
pressor and abnormal system operation
may occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
471
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. AUTO (automatic control) button
2. Driver’s temperature control knob
3. A/C display
4. Passenger’s temperature control knob
5. Dual temperature control selection button
6. OFF button
7. Front windshield defrost button
8. Air conditioning button
9. Fan speed control button
10. Air intake control button
11. Mode selection button
OLM049121L
Features of your vehicle
724
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
The automatic climate control system is
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
The Full Automatic Temperature Control
(FATC) system automatically controls the
heating and cooling system as follows;
1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicated
by AUTO on the display. The modes,
fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-
tioning will be controlled automatically
by temperature setting.
2. Set the temperature switch to the
desired temperature.
If the temperature is set to the lowest
setting (Lo), the air conditioning sys-
tem will operate continuously.
3. To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button or switch of the fol-
lowing:
• Mode selection button
• Air conditioning button
• Front windshield defroster button
• Air intake control button
• Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be controlled
manually while other functions operate
automatically.
For your convenience and to improve the
effectiveness of the climate control, use
the AUTO button and set the temperature
to 73°F (23°C).
✽✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
OLM049154
OLM049122L
473
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO
button. In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons or knob(s) selected.
When pressing any button (or turning
any knob) except the AUTO button while
using automatic operation, the functions
not selected will be controlled automati-
cally.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-
mate control system”.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
OLM049123
Features of your vehicle
744
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumb-
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position. To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the
right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the min-
imum (Lo) by turning the knob to the left
extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature
will increase or decrease by 1°F/0.5°C.
When set to the lowest temperature set-
ting, the air conditioning will operate con-
tinuously.
OLM049124L OLM049114 OLM049125L
475
Features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Also, if the passenger side
temperature control switch is operat-
ed, it will automatically change to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the left temperature control to
adjust the driver side temperature.
Operate the right temperature control
to adjust the passenger side tempera-
ture.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo) temper-
ature setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-
vated for maximum heating or cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control switch. The driver and passen-
ger side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol-
lows:
While pressing the OFF button, press the
AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.
The display will change from Fahrenheit
to Centigrade, or from Centigrade to
Fahrenheit.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode dis-
play will reset to Fahrenheit.
Outside thermometer
The current outside temperature is dis-
played in 1°F (1°C) increments. The tem-
perature range is between -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C).
• The outside temperature on the display
may not change immediately like a
general thermometer to prevent the
driver from being inattentive.
OLM049126 OLM049127N
Features of your vehicle
764
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside
and is heated or cooled
according to the function
selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
OLM049128L
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss
of vehicle control. Set the air intake
control to the outside (fresh) air
position as much as possible while
driving.
477
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by operating the fan speed control
switch.
To change the fan speed, press ( )
the switch for higher speed, or press
( ) the switch for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press the
front blower OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However, you can
still operate the mode and air intake but-
tons as long as the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
OLM049131OLM049129L OLM049130L
Features of your vehicle
784
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. If the position is
selected, air conditioning will also be
selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected auto-
matically, press the corresponding button
manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The dif-
ference between the temperature of
the outside air and the windshield
could cause the outer surface of
the windshield to fog up, causing
loss of visibility. In this case, set
the mode selection to the posi-
tion and fan speed control to the
lower speed.
OLM049132
479
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning will be selected automatically.
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient tem-
perature and outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatical-
ly, adjust the corresponding button man-
ually. If the position is selected,
lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher
fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
OLM049134 OLM049135OLM049133
Features of your vehicle
804
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
or air conditioning are controlled auto-
matically according to certain conditions
such as or position. To cancel or
return to the defogging logic, do the fol-
lowing.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Select the defrost position pressing
the defrost button ( ).
3. Press the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake control
button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second
of interval. It indicates that the defogging
logic is canceled or returned to the pro-
grammed status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Select the defroster position pressing
the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake con-
trol button at least 5 times within 3 sec-
onds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5
second of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
OLM049137N
OLM049136N
481
Features of your vehicle
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
Center console storage
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
To open the center console storage pull
up the lever.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key.
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover cannot close
securely.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
OLM049151 OLM049152
UU
UU
NN
NN
LL
LL
OO
OO
CC
CC
KK
KK
LL
LL
OO
OO
CC
CC
KK
KK
Features of your vehicle
824
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glass inside the sunglass holder.
Such objects can be thrown from
the holder in the event of a sud-
den stop or an accident, possibly
injuring the passengers in the
vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an open sun-
glass holder.
OLM049142
483
Features of your vehicle
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in. This can damage the heating element
and create a fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI
replacement or its approved equivalent.
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may
damage the socket or cause electri-
cal failure.
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after it
is already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
OLM049144
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
OLM049145
Features of your vehicle
844
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or
backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-
ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you burn yourself.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehi-
cle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
OLM049146
■ Front
OLM049147
■ Rear (if equipped)
OLM049207
485
Features of your vehicle
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
If you use the vanity mirror lamp,
turn off the lamp before return the
sunvisor to its original position. It
could result in battery discharge
and possible sunvisor damage.
OLM049150
OLM049153
■ Front
■ Rear (if equipped)
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for pro-
longed periods of time with the
engine off could cause the bat-
tery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
Features of your vehicle
864
Digital clock (if equipped)
Whenever the battery terminals or relat-
ed fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
Setup the clock
With audio off
1. Press the [SETUP] button until the
clock of the display blinks.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)
and press it.
With audio on
1. Press the [SETUP] button.
2. Select the [CLOCK] mode by turning
the knob(1) and press it.
3. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)
and press it.
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
OLM049208
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driv-
ing. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
OLM049228
WARNING
•
Make sure the floor mat is proper-
ly placed on the floor carpet. If the
floor mat slips and interferes with
the movement of the pedals during
driving, it may cause an accident.
• Don't put an additional floor mat
on the top of the anchored floor
mat, otherwise the additional mat
may slide forward and interfere
with the movement of the pedals.
■ Type A ■ Type B
487
Features of your vehicle
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the holders located in
the cargo area to attach the luggage net.
If necessary, contact your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer to obtain a luggage net.
Cargo security screen
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to hide
items stored in the cargo area.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use the luggage net when the strap
has visible signs of wear or dam-
age.
OLM049202 OLM049203
Features of your vehicle
884
To use the cargo security screen, pull the
handle backward and insert the edges
into the slots.
When not in use, place the cargo securi-
ty screen on the lower portion of the
cargo area.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the cargo
security screen. Such objects
may be thrown about inside the
vehicle and possibly injure vehi-
cle occupants during an accident
or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehi-
cle and locate the weight as far
forward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed, do
not put the luggage on it when it is
used.
OLM049204 OLM049205
489
Features of your vehicle
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
be sure not to position cargo onto the
roof rack in such a way that it could
interfere with sunroof operation.
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precau-
tions to make sure the cargo does
not damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof length
or width.
• When you are carrying cargo on
the roof rack, do not operate the
sunroof (if equipped).
OLM049206
WARNING
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible onto roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may dam-
age your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds
that may result in loss of vehicle
control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. Severe
wind updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof rack.
This is especially true when car-
rying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off
the roof rack and cause damage
to your vehicle or others around
you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check fre-
quently before or while driving to
make sure the items on the roof
rack are securely fastened.
ROOF 220 lbs. (100 kg)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Features of your vehicle
904
Antenna
Roof antenna
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive both AM and FM broadcast sig-
nals. This antenna is removable. To
remove the antenna, turn it counterclock-
wise. To install the antenna, turn it clock-
wise.
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel may incorporate
audio control buttons. These buttons are
installed to promote safe driving.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OHM048154
■ Type A ■ Type B
CAUTION
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance, be sure that the
antenna is removed.
• Be sure to remove the antenna
before washing the car in an auto-
matic car wash or it may be dam-
aged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight-
ened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper recep-
tion. But it could be removed
when parking the vehicle or when
loading cargo on the roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
491
Features of your vehicle
MODE (1)
Press the button to change audio source.
- FM(1~2)
➟ AM➟ SAT(1~3)➟ CD➟ USB
AUX(iPod) FM...
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different
functions based on the system mode.
For the following functions the button
should be pressed for 0.8 second or
more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CD/USB/ iPod mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for less than 0.8 second, it will work as
follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
buttons.
CD/USB/ iPod mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN but-
ton.
VOLUME (VOL / ) (3)
• Push the lever upward ( ) to
increase the volume.
• Push the lever downward ( ) to
decrease the volume.
MUTE (4)
• Press the button to mute the sound
• Press the button to turn off the micro-
phone during a telephone call.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
Aux, USB and iPod port
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod
port, you can use an aux port to connect
audio devices and the USB port to plug
in a USB device.
Both ports are used together with the
accessory iPod cable to connect an iPod.
✽✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
OLM049195
Features of your vehicle
924
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal
is then received by the radio and sent to
your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station.
Also, FM signals are easily affected by
buildings, mountains, or other obstruc-
tions.These can result in certain listening
conditions which might lead you to
believe a problem exists with your radio.
The following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble:
¢¢¢
¢¢¢
JBM002 JBM003
AM reception FM radio station
¢¢¢
JBM001
FM reception
493
Features of your vehicle
• Fading - As your vehicle moves away
from the radio station, the signal will
weaken and sound will begin to fade.
When this occurs, we suggest that you
select another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
JBM005
¢¢¢
JBM004
Features of your vehicle
944
Satellite radio reception
You may experience receiving difficulties
receiving XM™ satellite radio signals in
the following situations.
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a cov-
ered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top level
of a multi-level freeway.
• If you drive under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vechi-
cle(such as a truck or a bus) that block
the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the
signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain road
where is blocked by mountains.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal(10m or
more), for example on an road that
goes through a dense forset.
• The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the XM™
repeater network.
NOTE:
There may be other unforeseen cir-
cumstances leading to reception
problems with XM™ satellite radio
signal.
495
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-
lar phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
Care of discs
• If the temperature inside the vehicle is
too high, open the vehicle windows for
ventilation before using your vehicle
audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure objects other than CDs are
not inserted into the CD player (Do not
insert more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your
vehicle audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your vehicle audio. Please note that if
you try to play copy protected CDs and
the CD player does not perform correct-
ly the CDs maybe defective, not the CD
player.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone while
driving. Stop at a safe location to
use a cellular phone.
Features of your vehicle
964
1. AM Selection Button
2. FM Selection Button
3. Automatic Station Seek Button
4. Power ON/OFF Button and Volume
Control Knob
5. Preset Selection Button
6. SCAN Selection Button
7. DISP Button
8. SETUP Button
9. TUNE & AUDIO Control Knob
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (USA/CANCADA)
❋ There will be no , logo if the Bluetooth/XM SATELLITE feature is not supported.
497
Features of your vehicle
Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME
and AUDIO CONTROL
1. AM Selection Button
Pressing the [AM] button selects the AM
band. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.
2. FM Selection Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 and
FM2 when the button is pressed each
time.
3. Automatic Station Seek Button
• When the [SEEK ] is pressed, it will
automatically tune to the next lower
station.
• When the [SEEK ] is pressed, it will
automatically tune to the next higher
station.
4. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume
Control Knob
• Turns the audio system on/off when
the ignition switch is on ACC or ON.
• If the knob is turned clockwise/counter-
clockwise, the volume will increase
/decrease.
5. Preset Selection Button
• Press [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-
ond to play the station saved in each
button.
• Press [1]~[6] button more than 0.8 sec-
ond or longer to save the current station
to the respective button with a beep.
6. SCAN Button
• When the button is pressed, it auto-
matically scans the radio stations
upwards.
• The SCAN feature steps through each
station, starting from the initial station,
for ten seconds.
• Press the [SCAN] button again to stop
the scan feature and to listen to the
currently selected channel.
7. DISP Button
Turn the LCD Display & Backlight on/off
when [DISP] button press.
8. SETUP Button
Press this Button to enter SETUP mode,
If no action is taken for 8 seconds, it will
return to previous mode.
In “SETUP” mode, rotate the TUNE knob
to move the cursor between items, and
push the TUNE knob to select.
• SCROLL
Select whether long file names are
scrolled continuously (“ON”) or just once
(“OFF”).
• SDVC
Select this item to turn the SDVC(Speed
Dependent Volume Control) feature ON
or OFF. If it is turned ON, volume level is
adjusted automatically according to the
vehicle speed.
• P.BASS (PowerBass)
This function creates virtual sound
effects and allows adjustments to the
BASS level.
HIGH
➟ MID ➟ LOW ➟ OFF
• XM
Select default display of XM mode.
“Category/Channel name” or “Artist/Song
Title” can be selected.
Features of your vehicle
984
• PHONE (if available)
Select this item to enter BLUETOOTH
setup mode. Refer to “BLUETOOTH
PHONE OPERATION” section for
detailed information.
• Adjusting the Clock
Press the [SETUP] button. Use the vol-
ume controller to adjust the clock in the
following order: CLOCK
•
ENTER
•
hour or
minute.
Adjust the hour and press the [ENTER]
button to set. Use the same method to
adjust the minute and press the [ENTER]
button to complete and exit from clock
adjustment mode.
Pressing the [SETUP] button while in
POWER OFF screen will allow the user
to make immediately adjustments to the
clock.
9. TUNE Knob & Audio Control
Knob
• Rotate the knob clockwise or counter-
clock wise to increase or decrease from
current frequency.
(AM 10kHz, FM 200kHz)
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-
ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected
is shown on the display. After selecting
each mode, rotate the Audio control knob
clockwise or counterclockwise.
• BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID-
DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-
BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclock-
wise, front speaker sound will be empha-
sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
ated).
• BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counter clockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
499
Features of your vehicle
CD (USA/CANCADA)
❋ There will be no , logo if the Bluetooth/XM SATELLITE feature is not supported.
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Eject Button
3. CD Selection Button
4. Automatic Station Seek Button
5. RANDOM play Button
6. REPEAT Button
7. CD Indicator
8. SCAN Play Button
9. INFO Button
10. FOLDER Moving Button
11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
Features of your vehicle
1004
Using CD Player
1. CD Loading Slot
Insert a CD label side up and gently push
in while ignition switch is on ACC or ON.
The audio automatically switches to CD
mode and begins to play the CD. If the
audio was turned off, audio power will
automatically turned on as the CD is
inserted.
- This audio only recognizes 12 cm-size,
CD-DA (Audio CD) or ISO data-CD
(MP3 CD).
- If UDF data-CD or non-CD (e.g. DVD) is
inserted, "Reading Error" message will
be displayed and the disc will be eject-
ed.
2. CD Eject Button
• Press [ ] button to eject the CD. This
button works regardless of ignition
switch status.
3. CD Selection Button
If there is a CD in the CD DECK it switch-
es to CD mode.
If there is no CD, then the message "No
CD" will become displayed on the LCD
for 3 seconds and returns to the previous
mode.
4. Track Selection Button
• Press [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Press [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second and press again within 1
second to play the previous song.
• Press [TRACK ] button for 0.8 sec-
ond or longer to initiate reverse direc-
tion high speed sound search of cur-
rent song.
• Press [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second to play the next song.
• Press [TRACK ] button for 0.8 sec-
ond or longer to initiate forward direc-
tion high speed sound search of cur-
rent song.
5. RANDOM Play Button
• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
ond to play songs randomly in current
folder.
• Press this button for 0.8 second or
longer to play songs randomly in entire
CD.
• To cancel RANDOM Play, press this
button again.
6. REPEAT Button
• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
ond to repeat current song.
• Press this button for 0.8 second or
longer to repeat all songs in current
folder.
• To cancel REPEAT, press this button
again.
7. CD Indicator
When car ignition switch is ACC or ON
and if the CD is loaded, this indicator is
lit. If the CD is ejected, the light is turned
off.
8. SCAN Play Button
Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
9. INFO Button
Displayes the information of the current
song.
- Audio CD : Disc Title/Artist, Track Title
/Artist, Total Tracks.
CAUTION
Do not insert a CD if CD indicator is
lit.
4101
Features of your vehicle
- MP3 CD : File Name, Title, Artist,
Album, Folder, Total Files (Not dis-
played if the information is unavailable
on the CD or file.)
10. FOLDER Moving Button
• Press [FOLDER ] button to move to
child folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Press [FOLDER ] button to move to
parent folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
• Turn this knob clockwise to browse
songs after current song, or counter-
clockwise to browse songs before cur-
rent song. To play the displayed song,
press the knob.
• Pressing this knob without turning
enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
Features of your vehicle
1024
CAUTION IN USING
USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not
mounted when starting up the
vehicle and mount the device
after starting up.
• If you start the vehicle when the
USB device is mounted, it may
damage the USB device. (USB is
not ESA.)
• If the vehicle is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take cautions for static electricity
when mounting or dismounting
the external USB device.
• An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the con-
nected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB devices is
not either 512 BYTE or 2048
BYTE, then the device will not be
recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB IF
authentication may not be recog-
nizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with human bodies or external
objects.
• If you repeat mounting and dis-
mounting the USB device in a
short period of time, it may break
the device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when mounting or dismounting a
USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you dismount the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device can
be damaged or malfunction.
Therefore, mount the external USB
device when the engine is turned
off or in another mode.
• Depending on the type and capac-
ity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time taken for recognition of the
device, but this is not an indicator
of trouble and you only have to
wait.
• Do not use the USB device for other
purposes than playing music files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
recharger or heater using USB I/F
may lower performance or cause
trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device.
Connect the USB device directly
to the multimedia terminal of the
vehicle.
(Continued)
4103
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If USB device is divided by logical
drives, only the music files on the
highest-priority drive are recog-
nized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera
those are not recognizable by
standard USB I/F can be unrecog-
nizable.
• USB devices other than standard-
ized goods (METAL COVER TYPE
USB) can be unrecognizable.
• USB flash memory reader (such
as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or exter-
nal-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT)
are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this AUDIO. It
is recommended to back up
important data on a personal
storage device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug type
connector products as shown
below.
Features of your vehicle
1044
AUX/USB (USA/CANCADA)
1. AUX/USB Selection Button
2. TRACK Selection Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Selection Button
5. SCAN Selection Button
6. INFO Button
7. FOLDER Moving Button
8. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
❋ There will be no , logo if the Bluetooth/XM SATELLITE feature is not supported.
4105
Features of your vehicle
Using USB device
1. AUX/USB Selection Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
switches to AUX or USB mode to play the
sound from the auxiliary player.
If there is no auxiliary device, then the
message "No Media" will become dis-
played on the LCD for 3 seconds and
returns to previous mode.
2. TRACK Selection Button
• Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the begin-
ning of the current song.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-
ond and press it again within 1 second
to move to and play the previous song.
Press the button for 0.8 second or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to move to the next
song. Press the button for 0.8 second
or longer to play the song in forward
direction in fast speed.
3. RANDOM Playback Button
• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
ond to play songs randomly in current
folder.
• Press this button for 0.8 second or
longer to play songs randomly in entire
USB device.
• To cancel RANDOM play, press this
button again.
4. REPEAT Button
• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
ond to repeat current song.
• Press this button for 0.8 second or
longer to repeat all songs in current
folder.
• To cancel REPEAT, press this button
again.
5. SCAN Selection Button
Plays each song in the USB device for 10
seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
6. INFO Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME
➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER
➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟
FILE NAME ➟… (Displays no information
if the file has no song information.)
7. FOLDER Moving Button
• Press [FOLDER ] button to move to
child folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Press [FOLDER ] button to move to
parent folder display the first song in
the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
Features of your vehicle
1064
8. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
• Turn this knob clockwise to browse
songs after current song, or counter
clockwise to browse songs before cur-
rent song. To play the displayed song,
press the knob.
• Pressing this knob without turning
enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.
✽✽
NOTICE FOR USING iPod
DEVICE
• Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played. (iPod models
supported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,
5G)
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod crashes due to its own trou-
ble, reset iPod. (Reset: Refer to iPod
manual)
• iPod may not operate normally on low
battery.
(Continued)
• When the iPod cable is connected,
the system can be switched to the
AUX mode even without the iPod
device and can cause noise.
Disconnect iPod cable when you
are not using the iPod device.
• When the iPod is not used at
audio system, iPod cable has to
be separate from iPod device.
Origin display of iPod may not be
displayed.
CAUTION IN USING
iPod DEVICE
• You need the power cable exclu-
sive for iPod in order to operate
iPod with the buttons on the audio
system. The PC cable provided by
Apple may cause malfunction and
do not use it for vehicle use.
• When connecting the device with
iPod cable, push in the jack fully
not to interfere with communica-
tion.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of iPod and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will
overlap each and might cause
reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of iPod when adjusting
the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer
of iPod.
(Continued)
4107
Features of your vehicle
1. iPod Selection Button
2. TRACK Selection Button
3. REPEAT Selection Button
4. RANDOM Playback Button
5. INFO Button
6. CATEGORY Selection Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
iPod
®
(USA/CANADA)
❋ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple, Inc.
❋ There will be no , logo if the Bluetooth/XM SATELLITE feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
1084
Using iPod
1. iPod Selection Button
If iPod is connected, it switches to the
iPod mode from the previous mode to
play the song files stored in the iPod.
If there is no iPod connected, then it dis-
plays the message "No Media" for 3 sec-
onds and returns to the previous mode.
2. TRACK Selection Button
• Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the begin-
ning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-
ond and press it again within 1 second
to move to and play the previous track.
Press the button for 0.8 second or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to move to the next
track.
Press the button for 0.8 second or
longer to play the song in forward direc-
tion in fast speed.
3. REPEAT Button
Repeats the song currently played.
4. RANDOM Playback Button
• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
ond to shuffle order of all songs in cur-
rent category. (Song Random)
• Press this button for 0.8 second or
longer to shuffle order of albums in cur-
rent category. (Album Random)
• To cancel RANDOM Play, press this
button again.
5. INFO Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of TITLE
➟
ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY
➟ TITLE ➟... (Displays no information if
the file has no song information.)
6. CATEGORY Selection Button
Moves to the upper category from cur-
rently played category of the iPod.
To move to (play) the category (song)
displayed, press TUNE/ENTER knob.
You will be able to search through the
lower category of the selected category.
The order of iPod’s category is SONG,
ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and iPod.
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
When you rotate the knob clockwise, it
will display the songs (category) ahead
of the song currently played (category in
the same level).
Also, when you rotate the knob counter-
clockwise, it will display the songs (cate-
gory) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
To listen to the song displayed in the
song category, press the button to skip to
and play the selected song.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-
ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected
is shown on the display. After selecting
each mode, rotate the Audio control knob
clockwise or counterclockwise.
4109
Features of your vehicle
❋ There will be no , logo if the Bluetooth/XM SATELLITE
feature is not supported.
XM SATELLITE RADIO (USA/CANADA)
Using XM Satellite Radio
Your vehicle is equipped with 3 months
complimentary period of XM Satellite
Radio so you have access to over 130
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
1. XM Selection Button
Turns to XM Satellite Radio Mode. XM
mode toggles in order to XM1
➟XM2➟
XM3➟XM1... when the button is pressed
each time.
2. Channel Selection Button
• Push [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second to select previous channel.
• Push [TRACK ] button for 0.8 sec-
ond or longer to continuously move to
previous channel.
• Push [SEEK ] button for less than
0.8 second to select next channel.
• Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 second
or longer to continuously move to next
channel.
• Radio ID : Seek or Tune to XM channel
0 to display the Radio ID.
1. SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button
2. Channel Selection Button
3. Preset Selection Button
4. SCAN Selection Button
5. INFO Selection Button
6. CAT/FOLDER Button
7. Manual Channel Selection Button
Features of your vehicle
1104
3. Preset Selection Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-
ond to play the channel saved in each
button. Push Preset button for 0.8 sec-
ond or longer to save current channel to
the respective button with a beep.
4. SCAN Selection Button
Press to hear a brief sampling of all
channels. To cancel the scan mode,
press the button once again.
5. INFO Button
Displays the information of the current
channel in the order of Artist/Song title
➟
Category/Channel name➟Current Play
Channel
➟Artist/Song title➟Category/
Channel name... when the button is
pressed each time.
If can not display the whole text informa-
tion, rotate the tune button to see the
next page.
6. CATEGORY Search Button
• Push [FOLDER ] button to search
previous category.
• Push [CAT ] button to search next
category. To listen to the displayed cat-
egory, press the TUNE/SETUP button.
To scan channel in displayed category,
press the scan button. To search chan-
nel in displayed category, press seek
buttons or turn the tune button clock-
wise/counterclockwise.(CATEGORY
icon is will be turned on in Category
mode)
7. Manual Channel Selection Button
While listening to XM broadcast, rotate
this control to the right or left to search
other channels while listening to current
channel. (Turn to the right to searchhigh-
er channels and left, lower channels)
4111
Features of your vehicle
BLUETOOTH PHONE OPERATION
1.VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2. MUTE : Mute the microphone during a
call
3. TALK button : Activates voice recogni-
tion.
4. CALL button : Places and transfers
calls.
5. END button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
■
What is Bluetooth
®
?
Bluetooth
®
is a wireless technology that
allows multiple devices to be connected
in a short range, low-powered devices
like hands-free, stereo headset, wireless
remocon, etc. For more information, visit
the
Bluetooth
®
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
■
General Features
• This audio system supports Bluetooth
®
hands-free and stereo-headset fea-
tures.
- HANDS-FREE feature: Making or
receiving calls wirelessly through
voice recognition.
- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing
music from cellular phones (that sup-
ports A2DP feature) wirelessly.
• Voice recognition engine of the
Bluetooth
®
system supports 3 types of
languages:
- English
- US Spanish
- Canadian French
✽✽
NOTICE
• The phone must be paired to the sys-
tem before using Bluetooth
®
features.
• Only one selected (linked) cellular
phone can be used with the system at
a time.
• Some phones are not fully compatible
with this system.
■
Bluetooth Language Setting
The system language can be changed by
the following steps:
1. Power on the audio system with the
volume set to an audible level.
2. Press and hold button on the
steering wheel until the audio displays
“Please Wait”.
- The Bluetooth
®
system will reply in
currently selected language that it is
changing to the next language.
- System language cycles between
English, Canadian French and US
Spanish.
3. When completed, the audio display
returns to normal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the next lan-
guage selection.
Note:
The phone needs to be paired again
after changing system language.
- Avoid resting your thumb or finger
on the talk button as the language
could unintentionally change.
1
5
4
3
2
Features of your vehicle
1124
CAUTION IN USING
BLUETOOTH
®
CELLU-
LAR PHONE
• Do not use a cellular phone or
perform Bluetooth
®
settings (e.g.
pairing a phone) while driving.
• Some Bluetooth
®
-enabled phones
may not be recognized by the
system or fully compatible with
the system.
• Before using Bluetooth
®
related
features of the audio system,
refer your phone’s User’s Manual
for phone-side Bluetooth
®
opera-
tions.
•
The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth
®
related features.
• You will not be able to use hands-
free feature when your phone (in
the car) is outside of the cellular
service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a
underground, in a mountainous
area, etc.)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is
too loud, it may be difficult to hear
the other person's voice during a
call.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects.
Communications with Bluetooth
®
system or cellular service sta-
tions can be disturbed.
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth
®
your phone
may discharge quicker than usual
for additional Bluetooth
®
-related
operations.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio
system. In this case, store the
device in a different location may
resolve the situation.
4113
Features of your vehicle
■
Voice Recognition Activation
• The voice recognition engine contained
in the Bluetooth System can be activat-
ed in the following conditions:
- Button Activation
The voice recognition system will be
active when the button is
pressed and after the sound of a
Beep.
- Active Listening
The voice recognition system will be
active for a period of time when the
Voice Recognition system has asked
for a customer response.
• The system can recognize single digits
from zero to nine while number greater
than ten will not be recognized.
• If the command is not recognized, the
system will announce "Pardon" or No
input voice signal from microphone. (No
response)
• The system shall cancel voice recogni-
tion mode in following cases : When
pressing the button and saying
cancel following the beep. When not
making a call and pressing the but-
ton. When voice recognition has failed 3
consecutive times.
• At any time if you say “help”, the sys-
tem will announce what commands are
available.
■
Menu tree
The menu tree identifies available voice
recognition Bluetooth
®
functions.
■
Voice Operation Tip
To get the best performance out of the
Voice Recognition System, observe the
followings:
- Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the window to elim-
inate surrounding noise (traffic noise,
vibration sounds, etc), which may dis-
turb recognizing the voice command
correctly.
- Speak a command after a beep sound
within 5 seconds. Otherwise the com-
mand will not be received properly.
- Speak in a natural voice without paus-
ing between words.
Pair phone
Select phone
Change priority
Delete phone
Bluetooth off
Setup
Add entryPhonebook
Change
Delete name
By Phone
By voice
Call By name
By number
Features of your vehicle
1144
■
Information Display
The Bluetooth
®
icon appears on the
upper side of audio display when a
phone is connected.
■
Phone Setup
All Bluetooth
®
-related operations can be
performed by voice command or by man-
ual operation.
- By Voice Command:
Press button on the steering wheel
to activate voice recognition.
- By Manual Operation:
1) Push the TUNE knob to enter SETUP
mode
2) Select “PHONE” item by rotating the
TUNE knob, then push the knob.
3) Select desired item by rotating the
TUNE knob, then push the knob.
• Pairing phone
Before using Bluetooth
®
features, the
phone must be paired (registered) to the
audio system. Up to 5 phones can be
paired in the system.
Note:
The pairing procedure of the phone
varies according to each phone
model. Before attempting to pair
phone, please see your phone’s
User’s Guide for instructions.
<Active Call>
<Voice Recongnition Ready>
4115
Features of your vehicle
Note:
Once pairing with the phone is com-
pleted, there is no need to pair with
that phone again unless the phone is
deleted manually from the audio sys-
tem (refer “Deleting Phone” section)
or the vehicle’s information is
removed from the phone.
1. Press button.
2. Say “Set Up”.
- The system replies with available
commands.
- To skip the information message,
press again and then a beep is
heard.
3. Say “Pair Phone”
4. Say “Yes” to proceed.
5. Say the name of your phone when
prompted.
- Use any name to uniquely describe
your phone.
6. Bluetooth
®
system will repeat the
name you stated.
7. Say "Yes" to confirm.
8. The audio displays “searching
----
passkey: 0000” and asks you to initiate
pairing procedure from the phone.
9. Search the Bluetooth
®
system on your
phone .Your phone should display your
[vehicle model name] on the
Bluetooth
®
device list. Then attempt
pairing on your phone
10. After Pairing is completed, your
phone will start to transfer phone/con-
tact list to the audio system.
- This process may take from a few
minutes to over 10 minutes depend-
ing on the phone model and number
of entries in the phone/contact list.
11. By manual operation:
- Select “PAIR” in PHONE menu, then
proceed from step 5
Note:
Until the audio displays “Transfer
Complete”, Bluetooth
®
hands-free
feature may not be fully operational.
Note:
If the phone is paired to two or more
vehicles of the same model, i.e. both
vehicles are HMC TUCSON, some
phones may not handle Bluetooth
®
devices of that name correctly. In this
case, you may need to change the
name displayed on your phone from
TUCSON.
Refer to your phone’s User’s Guide, or
contact your cellular carrier or phone
manufacturer for instructions.
Features of your vehicle
1164
• Connecting phone
When the Bluetooth
®
system is enabled,
the phone previously used is automati-
cally selected and re-connected. If you
want to select different phone previously
paired, the phone can be selected
through “Select Phone” menu.
Only a selected phone can be used with
the hands-free system at a time.
1. Press button.
2. Say "Set Up".
3. Say "Select Phone" after prompt
- The system lists all the registered
phone names.
4. Say the name or number of desired
phone from the list.
5. Say "Yes" to confirm.
6. By manual operation:
- Select “SELECT” in PHONE menu,
then select desired phone from the list.
• Deleting Phone
The paired phone can be deleted.
- When the phone is deleted, all the infor-
mation associated with that phone is
also be deleted (including phonebook).
- If you want to use the deleted phone
with the audio system again, pairing
procedure must be completed once
more.
1.Press button.
2.Say “Set Up”.
3.Say “Delete Phone” after prompt.
- The system lists all the registered
phone names.
4.Say the name or number of desired
phone from the list.
5.Say “Yes” to confirm.
6.By manual operation:
- Select “DELETE” in PHONE menu,
then select desired phone from the list.
• Changing Priority
When several phones are paired to the
audio system, the system attempts to
connect following order when the
Bluetooth
®
system is enabled:
1) “Priority” checked phone.
2) Previously connected phone
3) Gives up auto connection.
1. Press button.
2. Say “Set Up”.
3. Say “Change Priority” after prompt.
- The system lists all the registered
phone names.
4. Say the name or number of desired
phone from the list.
5. Say “Yes” to confirm.
6. By manual operation:
- Select “PRIORITY” in PHONE menu,
then select desired phone from the
list.
4117
Features of your vehicle
• Adjusting Bluetooth
®
Volume
Bluetooth
®
system volume can be
adjusted separately from main volume of
the audio system. Volume control is avail-
able by manual operation only.
- Select “BT VOL” in PHONE menu,
adjust volume to desired level by turn-
ing the TUNE knob, then press the
knob again to confirm.
• Turning Bluetooth® ON/OFF
Bluetooth® system can be enabled (ON)
or disabled (OFF) by this menu.
- If Bluetooth® is disabled, all the com-
mands related to Bluetooth
®
system
prompts whether you wish to turn
Bluetooth® ON or not.
1. Press button.
2. Say “Set Up”
3. Say “Bluetooth Off” after prompt.
4. Say “Yes” to confirm.
5. By manual operation:
- Select “BT Off” in PHONE menu,
then after announcement, say “YES”
to confirm.
■
Phone Book (In-Vehicle)
• Adding Entry
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered. Entries registered in the
phone can also be transferred.
• Adding Entry by Voice
1. Press button.
2. Say "Phonebook".
- The system replies with all available
commands.
- To skip the information message,
press again and then a beep is
heard.
3. Say "Add Entry".
4. Say "By Voice" to proceed.
5. Say the name of the entry when
prompted.
6. Say “Yes” to confirm.
7. Say the phone number of that entry
when prompted.
8. Say “Store” if phone number input is
finished.
9. Say a phone number type. “Home”,
“Work”, “Mobile”, “Other” or “Default” is
available.
10. Say “Yes” to complete adding entry.
11. Say “Yes” to store additional location
for this contact, or say “Cancel” to fin-
ish the process.
✽✽
NOTICE
- The system can recognize single digits
from zero to nine. Numbers that are
ten or greater cannot be recognized.
- You can enter each digit individually
or group digits together in preferred
string lengths.
- To speed up input, it is a good idea to
group all digits into a continuous
string.
- The display corresponding to each
operation appears on the screen as fol-
lows:
- Input operation example:
1. Say: “Nine, nine, five”
➟ Display: “995”
2. And say: “Seven, three, four”
➟ Display: “995734”
Features of your vehicle
1184
• Adding Entry by Phone
1. Press button.
2. Say "Phonebook".
3. Say "Add Entry" after prompt.
4. Say "By Phone" to proceed.
5. Say “Yes” to confirm.
6.Your phone will start to transfer
phone/contact list to the audio system.
This process may take over 10 minutes
depending on the phone model and
number of entries
7. Wait till the audio displays “Transfer
Complete” message.
• Changing Name
The registered names can be modified.
1.Press button.
2.Say “Phonebook”
3.Say “Change Name” after prompt.
4.Say the name of the entry (voice tag)
5.Say “Yes” to confirm.
6.Say new desired name.
• Deleting Name
The registered names can be deleted.
1.Press button.
2.Say “Phonebook”
3.Say “Delete Name” after prompt.
4.Say the name of the entry (voice tag)
5.Say “Yes” to confirm.
■
Making a Phone Call
• Calling by Name
A phone call can be made by speaking
names registered in the audio system.
1. Press button.
2. Say "Call".
3. Say “Name” when prompted.
4. Say desired name (voice tag).
5. Say desired location (phone number
type). Only stored locations can be
selected.
6. Say “Yes” to confirm and make a call.
✽✽
Tip
A shortcut to each of the following func-
tions is available:
1. Say “Call Name”
2. Say “Call <john>”
3. Say “Call <john> at <home>”
4119
Features of your vehicle
• Dialing by Number
A phone call can be made by dialing the
spoken numbers. The system can recog-
nize single digits from zero to nine.
1.Press button.
2.Say “Call”.
3.Say “Number” when prompted.
4.Say desired phone numbers.
5.Say “Dial” to complete the number and
make a call.
✽✽
Tip
A shortcut to each of the following func-
tions is available:
1. Say “Dial Number”
2. Say “Dial <digit>”
■
Receiving a Phone Call
When receiving a phone call, a ring tone
is audible from speakers and the audio
system changes into telephone mode.
When receiving a phone call, “Incoming”
message and incoming phone number (if
available) are displayed on the audio.
• To Answer a Call:
- Press button on the steering
wheel.
• To Reject a Call:
- Press button on the steering wheel.
• To Adjust Ring Volume:
- Use VOLUME buttons on the steering
wheel.
• To Transfer a Call to the Phone (Secret
Call):
- Press and hold button on the steer-
ing wheel until the audio system trans-
fers a call to the phone.
■
Talking on the Phone
When talking on the phone, “Active Calls”
message and the other party’s phone
number (if available) are displayed on the
audio.
• To Mute the Microphone
- Press button on the steering wheel.
• To Finish a Call
- Press button on the steering wheel.
✽✽
NOTICE
In the following situations, you or the
other party may have difficulty hearing
each other:
1. Speaking at the same time, your voice
may not reach each other parties. (This
is not a malfunction.) Speak alternate-
ly with the other party on the phone.
2. Keep the Bluetooth(
®
) volume to a
low level. High-level volume may
result in distortion and echo.
3. When driving on a rough road.
4. When driving at high speeds.
5. When the window is open.
6. When the air conditioning vents are
facing the microphone.
7. When the sound of the air condition-
ing fan is loud.
■
Using the head unit as Bluetooth
music
The head unit supports A2DP (Audio
Advanced Distribution Profile) and
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
Profile).
Both profiles are available for listening to
the MP3 music via Bluetooth cellular
phone supporting above Bluetooth pro-
files.
To play MP3 music from the Bluetooth
cellular phone, press the [AUX] button
until “MP3 Play” is displayed on the LCD.
Then try playing music by phone.
When playing music from the Bluetooth
cellular phone, the head unit displays
MP3 MODE.
Note:
• Not only MP3 files, all the sounds
that the phone supports can be
heard by the audio system.
• The Bluetooth cellular phones shall
feature A2DP and AVRCP functions.
• Some A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth
cellular phones may not play music
through the head unit on first try.
Please try the below;
i.e : Menu
➟File manager➟Music➟
Option➟Play via Bluetooth
• Please refer to User’s Guide of your
phone for more detailed informa-
tions. To stop music, try stop music
by the phone and change audio
mode to different one. (e.g. FM, CD,
iPod, ...)
4120
Features of your vehicle
5
Before driving / 5-3
Key positions / 5-5
Manual transaxle / 5-7
Automatic transaxle / 5-10
All wheel drive (AWD) / 5-17
Brake system / 5-24
Cruise control system / 5-36
Economical operation / 5-40
Special driving conditions / 5-42
Winter driving / 5-46
Trailer towing / 5-50
Vehicle load limit / 5-57
Vehicle weight / 5-61
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
25
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-
dows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-
tion.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
53
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in sec-
tion 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
vehicle into “Drive” or “Reverse”.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-
TION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehi-
cle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Driving your vehicle
45
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of drugs
is as dangerous or more dangerous
than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
WARNING
When you intend to park or stop the
vehicle with the engine on, be care-
ful not to depress the accelerator
pedal for a long period of time. It
may overheat the engine or exhaust
system and cause fire.
55
Driving your vehicle
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
✽✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START posi-
tion to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition key to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
is not a substitute for the parking
brake. Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park) for the
automatic transaxle and set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is
in motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily injury
or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci-
dent.
OUN036002
KEY POSITIONS
Driving your vehicle
65
Starting the engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depress-
ing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes when
operating your vehicle. Unsuitable
shoes (high heels, ski boots,etc.)
may interfere with your ability to use
the brake and accelerator pedal, and
the clutch (if equipped).
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion. If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn the
ignition switch to the START posi-
tion in an attempt to restart the
engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
57
Driving your vehicle
Manual transaxle operation
The manual transaxle has 5 (or 6) for-
ward gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily accom-
plished.
Press the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, then release it slowly.
The gearshift lever must be returned to
the neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse).
The ring (1) located immediately below
the shift knob must be pulled upward
while moving the shift lever to the R posi-
tion. (if equipped)
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM059009/OLM059009L
CAUTION
• When downshifting from fifth
gear to fourth gear, caution
should be taken not to inadver-
tently press the gear shift lever
sideways in such a manner that
second gear is engaged. Such a
drastic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such over-
revving of the engine may possi-
bly cause engine damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine.
The shift lever can be moved without pulling
the ring (1).
The ring (1) must be pulled up while moving
the shift lever.
■■
6 speed
■■
5 speed
Driving your vehicle
85
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),
put the shift lever in N (Neutral) posi-
tion and release the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way
to the floor before shifting, then released
slowly. The clutch pedal should always be
fully released while driving. Do not rest
your foot on the clutch pedal while driv-
ing. This can cause unnecessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold
the vehicle on an incline. This causes
unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or
parking brake to hold the vehicle on an
incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal
rapidly and repeatedly.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traf-
fic or while driving up steep hills, down-
shift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is traveling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, while waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
• When operating the clutch pedal,
press the clutch pedal down fully.
If you don't press the clutch pedal
fully, the clutch may be damaged
or noise may occur.
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level or uphill grade,
and shifted into R (Reverse) on a
downhill grade. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are not
followed in the order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may move
and cause a serious accident
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal while
the parking brake is released and
the shift lever not in the N
(Neutral) position.
59
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better con-
trol of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
reverse. The transaxle can be dam-
aged if you do not. To shift into reverse,
depress the clutch, move the shift lever
to neutral, then shift to the reverse
position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
105
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 forward
speeds and one reverse speed. The indi-
vidual speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
✽✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM059010
+ (UP)
+ (UP)
- (DO
- (DO
WN)
WN)
Depress the brake pedal when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
511
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the serv-
ice brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
125
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R while
the vehicle is in motion, except as
explained in “Rocking the vehicle”
in this section.
513
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving on
a slippery road. Push the shift lever to
the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st
gear.
OLM059012
Spor
Spor
ts mode
ts mode
Driving your vehicle
145
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering
the shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver (or key) into the
access hole and press down on the
screwdriver (or key).
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer immedi-
ately.
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into another
position to avoid inadvertent motion
of the vehicle which could injure
persons in or around the vehicle.
OLM059013
515
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
165
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will
help prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
517
Driving your vehicle
Engine power can be delivered to all front
and rear wheels for maximum traction.
AWD is useful when extra traction is
required on road, such as, when driving
on slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-covered
roads. These vehicles are not designed
for challenging off-road use. Occasional
off-road use such as established
unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is
always important when traveling off-high-
way that the driver carefully reduces the
speed to a level that does not exceed the
safe operating speed for those condi-
tions. In general, off-road conditions pro-
vide less traction and braking effective-
ness than normal road conditions. The
driver must be especially alert to avoid
driving on slopes which tilt the vehicle to
either side.
These factors must be carefully consid-
ered when driving off-road. Keeping the
vehicle in contact with the driving surface
and under control in these conditions is
always the driver's responsibility for the
safety of him/herself and his or her pas-
sengers.
Tight corner brake effect
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of all-wheel drive vehicles
caused by the difference in tire rotation at
the all wheels and the zero-degree align-
ment of the front wheels and suspension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be car-
ried out with caution.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Off road driving
This vehicle is designed primarily
for on road use although it can oper-
ate effectively off road. However, it
was not designed to drive in chal-
lenging off-road conditions. Driving
in conditions that exceed the vehi-
cle's intended design or the driver's
experience level may result in
severe injury or death.
CAUTION - AWD
When turning sharply on a paved
road at low speed while in four-
wheel drive, steering control will be
difficult.
WARNING
When AWD system warning light
illuminates, AWD system does not
operate.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Driving your vehicle
185
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 19 mph (30 km/h) and is shifted to AWD AUTO mode
at speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), however, the transfer
mode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.
AWD AUTO
(AWD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
✽✽
NOTICE
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indicator light goes
off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise or vibration.
The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated. Some parts of the power train may be dam-
aged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the front wheels.
This shock is not a mechanical failure.
ALL Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates sim-
ilar to conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is dis-
tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter-
vention.
• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
AWD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
519
Driving your vehicle
For safe all-wheel drive operation
• Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehicle.
• When you are driving up or down hills
drive as straight as possible. Use
extreme caution in going up or down
steep hills, since you may flip your
vehicle over depending on the grade,
terrain and water/mud conditions.
WARNING - Four-wheel
driving
The conditions of on-road or off-
road that demand four-wheel drive
mean all functions of your vehicle
are exposed to extreme stress than
under normal road conditions. Slow
down and be ready for changes in
the composition and traction of the
surface under your tires. If you
have any doubt about the safety of
the conditions you are facing, stop
and consider the best way to pro-
ceed. Do not exceed the ability of
yourself or your vehicle to operate
safely.
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of steep
hills can be extremely dangerous.
This danger can come from slight
changes in the wheel angle which
can destabilize the vehicle or, even
if the vehicle is maintaining stabili-
ty under power, it can lose that sta-
bility if the vehicle stops its forward
motion. Your vehicle may roll over
without warning and without time
for you to correct a mistake that
could cause serious injury or
death.
HILL1 HILL2
Driving your vehicle
205
• You must consciously take the effort to
learn how to corner in a AWD vehicle.
Do not rely on your experience in con-
ventional 2WD vehicles in choosing
safe cornering speed in AWD mode.
For starters, you must drive more slow-
ly in AWD.
• Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are
going to drive before you begin driving.
• Always hold the steering wheel firmly
when you are driving off-road.
• Make sure all passengers are wearing
seat belts.
• If you need to drive in the water, stop
your vehicle, set your transfer to the
AWD LOCK mode and drive at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab the inside of the steer-
ing wheel when you are driving off-
road. You may hurt your arm by a
sudden steering maneuver or from
steering wheel rebound due to
impact with objects on the ground.
You could lose control of the steer-
ing wheel.
WARNING - Wind danger
If you are driving in heavy wind, the
vehicle's higher center of gravity
decreases your steering control
capacity and requires you to drive
more slowly.
WARNING - Driving
through water
Drive slowly. If you are driving too
fast in water, the water can get into
the engine compartment and wet
the ignition system, causing your
vehicle to suddenly stop. If this
happens and your vehicle is in a
tilted position, your vehicle may roll
over.
OLM059022L
WARNING -
AWD
Reduce speed when you turn cor-
ners. The center of gravity of AWD
vehicles is higher than that of con-
ventional 2WD vehicles, making
them more likely to roll over when
you turn corners too fast.
521
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the bottom of the vehicle.
• Check your brake condition once you
are out of mud or water. Press the
brake pedal several times as you move
slowly until you feel normal braking
forces return.
• Shorten your scheduled maintenance
interval if you drive in off-road condi-
tions such as sand, mud or water (see
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in section 7). Always wash
your vehicle thoroughly after off road
use, especially cleaning the bottom of
the vehicle.
• Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the perform-
ance of the AWD vehicle is greatly
affected by the condition of the tires.
Be sure to equip the vehicle with four
tires of the same size and type.
• A full time four wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary tow
truck. Make sure that the vehicle is
placed on a flat bed truck for moving.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is
defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV).
SUV’s have higher ground clearance and
a narrower track to make them capable
of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteris-
tics give them a higher center of gravity
than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of
the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, which allows you to
anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger vehi-
cles, any more than low-slung sports
vehicles are designed to perform satis-
factorily in off-road conditions. Due to this
risk, driver and passengers are strongly
recommended to buckle their seat belts.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. There are steps that a driver
can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your roof
rack with heavy cargo, and never modify
your vehicle in any way.
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow, etc.
the vehicle can sometimes be driv-
en out by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal further; however avoid
running the engine continuously at
high rpm because doing so could
damage the AWD system.
WARNING - AWD driving
• Avoid high cornering speed.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at high speed.
• In a collision, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die
compared to a person wearing a
seat belt.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over
steers to re-enter the roadway. In
the event your vehicle leaves the
roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
Driving your vehicle
225
WARNING - Jacked vehicle
While the full-time AWD vehicle is
being raised on a jack, never start
the engine or cause the tires to
rotate.
There is the danger that rotating
tires touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to go off the jack
and to jump forward.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide safe ride and
handling capability. Do not use a
size and type of tire and wheel that
is different from the one that is
originally installed on your vehicle.
It can affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle, which could
lead to steering failure or rollover
and serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all four
tires with the tire and wheel of the
same size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you never-
theless decide to equip your vehi-
cle with any tire/wheel combination
not recommended by HYUNDAI for
off road driving, you should not use
these tires for highway driving.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility Vehicle
(SUV), failure to operate this vehi-
cle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a significant-
ly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteristics
(higher ground clearance, nar-
rower track, etc.) give this vehicle
a higher center of gravity than
ordinary vehicles.
• A SUV is not designed for corner-
ing at the same speeds as con-
ventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more like-
ly to die than a person wearing a
seat belt. Make sure everyone in
the vehicle is properly buckled
up.
523
Driving your vehicle
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be tested
on a special four wheel chassis
dynamometer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake while
performing these tests.
• A full-time AWD vehicle should not be
tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a 2WD
roll tester must be used, perform the
following:
1. Check the tire pressures recommend-
ed for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as shown
in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the tempo-
rary free roller as shown in the illustra-
tion.
WARNING - Dynamometer
testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in gear
on the dynamometer. This is very
dangerous as the vehicle can jump
forward and cause serious injury or
death.
OCM051044L
Roll tester (speedometer)
Temporary free roller
CAUTION
• When lifting up the vehicle, do not
operate front and rear wheel sep-
arately. All four wheels should be
operated.
• If you need to operate the front
wheel and rear wheel when lifting
up the vehicle, you should
release the parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
245
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would. The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to safely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
525
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
■■
Foot type
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then depress the park-
ing brake pedal down as far as possible.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
OLM059014
Driving your vehicle
265
■■
Hand type
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then pull up the park-
ing brake lever as far as possible.
In addition it is recommended that when
parking the vehicle on an incline, the shift
lever should be in a low gear on manual
transaxle vehicles or in the P (Park) posi-
tion on automatic transaxle vehicles.
Releasing the parking brake
■■
Foot type
To release the parking brake, depress
the parking brake pedal a second time
while applying the foot brake. The pedal
will automatically extend to the fully
released position.
■■
Hand type
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly depress the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) while holding the button.
OLM059016 OLM059015 OLM059017
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive brake
pad and brake rotor wear.
527
Driving your vehicle
If the parking brake does not release or
does not release all the way, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated when
the parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on after
the parking brake is released while the
engine is running, there may be a mal-
function in the brake system. Immediate
attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion or repair shop.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
W-75
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the shift
lever in place of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake AND
make sure the shift lever is
securely positioned in P (Park).
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicles
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
Control System) may be longer
than for those without it in the fol-
lowing road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
285
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion allows the ABS to control the force
being delivered to the brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
(Continued)
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESC) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
529
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be
active continuously and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. Pull
your vehicle over to a safe place
and stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Driving your vehicle
305
Electronic stability control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the
brakes at individual wheels and
intervenes in the engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Control System is functioning properly.
OLM059020L
WARNING
Never drive too fast according to
the road conditions or too quickly
when cornering. Electronic stability
control (ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents. Excessive speed in turns,
abrupt maneuvers and hydroplan-
ing on wet surfaces can still result
in serious accidents. Only a safe
and attentive driver can prevent
accidents by avoiding maneuvers
that cause the vehicle to lose trac-
tion. Even with ESC installed,
always follow all the normal precau-
tions for driving - including driving
at safe speeds for the conditions.
531
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revo-
lutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF indicator light illu-
minates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESC will automatically turn
on again.
-
Driving your vehicle
325
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the indicator light illuminates,
then goes off if the ESC system is oper-
ating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes on
when the ESC is turned off with the but-
ton.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily driv-
ing whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is
turned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-
ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-
vent the vehicle speed from increas-
ing, and result in false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating (ESC indica-
tor light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
533
Driving your vehicle
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip back
on a steep hill when it starts to go after
stopping. The Hill-start Assist Control
(HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping
back by operating the brakes automati-
cally for about 2 seconds. The brakes are
released when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESC is off but it does not activate
when the ESC has malfunctioned.
Downhill brake control (DBC)
(if equipped)
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC) sup-
ports the driver come down a steep hill
without the driver depressing the brake
pedal. It slows down the vehicle under
5 mph (8 km/h) with the automatic
transaxle or 9 mph (15 km/h) with the
manual transaxle and lets the driver con-
centrate on steering the vehicle.
DBC defaults to the OFF position when-
ever the ignition is turned on.
The DBC can be turned on or off by
pushing the button.
OLM059021L
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for about
2 seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the
accelerator pedal.
Driving your vehicle
345
✽✽
NOTICE
• The DBC does not turn ON in the P
(Park) position.
• The DBC may not activate if the ESC
(or BAS) is activated.
• Noise or vibration may occur from the
brakes when the DBC is activated.
• The rear stop light comes on when the
DBC is activated.
• In a very steep hill even though the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal is
depressed the DBC may not deacti-
vate.
• Always turn OFF the DBC on normal
roads. The DBC might activate from
the standby mode when abrupt corn-
ing or driving through speed bumps.
• DBC may activate and cause the
engine to stop in vehicles with manual
transaxle if you drive in 3rd gear (or
above) with DBC on. Do not turn on
DBC when driving in 3rd gear (or
above).
Standby
Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under
25 mph (40 km/h). The DBC system will turn ON and
enter the standby mode.
The system does not turn ON if the vehicle speed is
over 25 mph (40 km/h).
In the standby mode, if the vehicle speed is under
22 mph (35 km/h) while driving down a steep hill, the
DBC will activate automatically.
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deacti-
vate under the following conditions:
• The hill is not steep enough.
•
The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automat-
ically activate again.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
• The DBC button is pressed again.
• The vehicle speed is over 38 mph (60 km/h).
Activated
Temporarily
deactivated
OFF
Mode Indicator light Description
blinks
illuminated
not
illuminated
illuminated
WARNING
If the DBC red indicator light illuminates, the system has overheated or some-
thing is wrong. The DBC will not activate. If the DBC red indicator light illu-
minates even though the DBC system has been cooled enough have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
535
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking brake
indicator light is out before driving
away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet.They can also get wet when
the vehicle is washed. Wet brakes can
be dangerous! Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to
one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the vehicle
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assis-
tance.
• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely haz-
ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that engine
braking will help you maintain a safe
speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driv-
ing can be dangerous because the
brakes might overheat and lose their
effectiveness. It also increases the wear
of the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
vehicle pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving slow-
ly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull
off the road and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic transaxle, don't let your vehicle
creep forward. To avoid creeping for-
ward, keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep the
vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the shift lever
in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park your
vehicle, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the P (Park) position. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may move
inadvertently and injure yourself
and others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
Driving your vehicle
365
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
✽✽
NOTICE
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the vehicle at a constant speed,
for instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
OLM059030N
CAUTION
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without depress-
ing the clutch pedal, since the
engine will be overrevved. If this
happens, depress the clutch pedal
or release the cruise control ON-
OFF switch.
537
Driving your vehicle
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button on
the steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
SET indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. Release the
accelerator at the same time. The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you want.
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.0 mph (1.6
km/h) each time you move the lever up
(to RES+) in this manner.
OLM059031L OLM059033L OLM059032L
Driving your vehicle
385
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.0 mph (1.6
km/h) each time you move the lever
down (to SET-) in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Press the clutch pedal with a manual
transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 9 mph (15
km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
OLM059033L OLM059034L
539
Driving your vehicle
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, move
up the lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h):
If any method other than the CRUISE
ON-OFF switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed will
automatically resume when you move
the lever (1) up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want to
resume the cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
OLM059032L OLM059031L
Driving your vehicle
405
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-
lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the fol-
lowing driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid
heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnec-
essary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed,
especially on the highway, is one of the
most effective ways to reduce fuel con-
sumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal or clutch
pedal. This can increase fuel consump-
tion and also increase wear on these
components. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness and
may lead to more serious conse-
quences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition.
For better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your vehi-
cle in accordance with the mainte-
nance schedule in section 7. If you
drive your vehicle in severe conditions,
more frequent maintenance is required
(see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the vehicle. This
extra weight can result in increased
fuel consumption and also contribute
to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
541
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too high
a gear resulting in the engine bucking.
If this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled
inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
Driving your vehicle
425
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free
it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the
area around your front wheels. Then, shift
back and forth between 1st (First) and R
(Reverse) and any forward gear in vehi-
cles equipped with an automatic
transaxle. Do not race the engine, and
spin the wheels as little as possible. If you
are still stuck after a few tries, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possible
damage to the transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
1VQA3002
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
WARNING
- Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tire damage.
543
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 35 mph (56
km/h). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
ORV047004 OCM053010
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Driving your vehicle
445
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night. Headlight operation
shield using windshield wipers is
mandatory in some states.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking oper-
ation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
1VQA3003
545
Driving your vehicle
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire fail-
ure.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check tires for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tire pressures, refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 8.
• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
car. For further information and
tread limits, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 7.
1VQA1004
Driving your vehicle
465
The more severe weather conditions of
winter result in greater wear and other
problems. To minimize the problems of
winter driving, you should follow these
suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and han-
dling of your vehicle. Furthermore,
speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden
brake applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehi-
cle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-
imum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1VQA3005
547
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
When using tire chains, attach them to
the drive wheels as follows.
2WD : Front wheels
AWD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not avail-
able for an AWD vehicle, chains
may be installed on the front
wheels only.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5
to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.
Retighten or remount the chains
if they are loose.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
1VQA3007
Driving your vehicle
485
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
549
Driving your vehicle
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily while you put the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the car cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the vehicle to be sure the
movement of the front wheels and the
steering components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er, you should carry appropriate emer-
gency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tire chains, tow
straps or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a
window scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Driving your vehicle
505
If you are considering towing with your
vehicle, you should first check with your
state’s Department of Motor Vehicles to
determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary from state to state the
requirements for towing trailers, cars, or
other types of vehicles or apparatus may
differ. Ask an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er for further details before towing.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the infor-
mation in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
TRAILER TOWING
WARNING - Towing a trail-
er
If you don't use the correct equip-
ment and drive improperly, you can
lose control when you pull a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, GCW (gross combi-
nation weight), GVW (gross vehicle
weight), GAW (gross axle weight)
and trailer tongue load are all with-
in the limits.
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
551
Driving your vehicle
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few rea-
sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to
seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a frame-
mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory is
available at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-
ufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the maxi-
mum allowed weight without trailer
brakes, then the trailer will also require its
own brakes as well. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-
tem.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experi-
enced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
Driving your vehicle
525
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-
ing and then apply the trailer brake con-
troller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electri-
cal connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still work-
ing.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-
cle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane. Due to the added load to the
engine when going uphill the vehicle may
also take longer to pass than it would on
flat ground.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance before turning or lane changes.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trail-
er bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you discon-
nect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring har-
ness.
553
Driving your vehicle
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring harness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70
km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle,
you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-
ing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if they
unexpectedly roll down hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the curb (right if headed down hill,
left if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,
place the car in neutral. If the vehicle
has an automatic transaxle, place the
car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-
ing brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P
(Park) automatic transaxle.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not over-
heat. If the needle of the coolant
temperature gauge moves across
the dial towards “H” (HOT), pull
over and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so, and allow the engine to
idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam-
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause serious
injury or death, should the trailer
break loose or brake stops working.
Driving your vehicle
545
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
When you are ready to leave after park-
ing on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neutral
or automatic transaxle in P (Park),
apply your brakes and hold the brake
pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular atten-
tion to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, con-
duct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the A/C
and stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with the air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
555
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car dur-
ing its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in
order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-
sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-
ate speed (less than 60 mph / 100
km/h).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important consider-
ations that have to do with weight:
Item Ibs. (kg)
Maximum trailer weight
Without brake
System 1000 (454)
With brake System 2000 (907)
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling device
91 (41)
Driving your vehicle
565
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of a
trailer? It should never weigh more than
the maximum trailer weight with trailer
brakes. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-
mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
trailer tongue load permissible. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-
er and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately 40%
of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail-
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
557
Driving your vehicle
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
926 lbs. (420 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
Without trailer brakes:
1000 lbs (454 kg)
With trailer brakes:
2000 lbs (907 kg)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trail-
er.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OLM059100N
OLM059101N
Driving your vehicle
585
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lb
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific informa-
tion about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The com-
bined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle's capacity weight.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
1100 lbs
Luggage weight (499 kg)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
650 lbs
Luggage weight (295 kg)
ABC
Example 2
559
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
860 lbs
172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
(390 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
540 lbs
Luggage weight (245 kg)
ABC
Example 3
OEN056020
WARNING - Over loading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weigh-
ing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle. Be careful not to over-
load your vehicle.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
605
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
(Continued)
• Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either
the maximum front or rear
GAWR and vehicle capacity
weight. If you do, parts,
including tires on your vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles
and braking ability. This could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehi-
cle.
WARNING
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure that could lead to a
crash.
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping dis-
tances that could lead to a
crash.
• A crash resulting from poor
handling vehicle damage, tire
failure, or increased stopping
distances could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Items you carry inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
occupants in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
• Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
CAUTION
• Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would
not be covered by your warran-
ty. Do not overload your vehicle.
• Using heavier suspension com-
ponents to get added durability
might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help
you load your vehicle the right
way.
561
Driving your vehicle
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-
lowing terms for determining your vehi-
cle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the certification label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label located on the driver’s
door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
6
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2
If the engine will not start / 6-3
Emergency starting / 6-4
If the engine overheats / 6-6
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-7
If you have a flat tire / 6-12
Towing / 6-20
What to do in an emergency
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Depress the flasher switch with the igni-
tion switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehi-
cle is being towed.
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-
cle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the vehicle slow down while
driving straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible
and park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not park
in the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
OLM049084
63
What to do in an emergency
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the vehicle that is away from
traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, check all connectors at igni-
tion coils and spark plugs. Reconnect
any that may be disconnected or
loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-
partment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage. In addition,
push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter to be over-
loaded and create a fire hazard.
What to do in an emergency
46
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged
battery
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
65
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative ter-
minal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to a solid, stationary,
metallic point (for example, the engine
lifting bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control sys-
tem.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter-
minal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged bat-
tery to overheat and crack, releas-
ing battery acid.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
66
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or neutral (manual transaxle)
and set the parking brake. If the air con-
ditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from the hood, stop the engine. Do not
open the hood until the coolant has
stopped running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss of
engine coolant and no steam, leave
the engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is operat-
ing. If the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
67
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
OLM069012
What to do in an emergency
86
✽✽
NOTICE
If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure indi-
cator do not illuminate for 3 seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position or engine is running,
or if they remain illuminated after
coming on for approximately 3 sec-
onds, take your vehicle to your near-
est authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicator illuminates,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated.
Immediately reduce your speed,
avoid hard cornering and anticipate
increased stopping distances. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible. Inflate the tires to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation
pressure label located on the driver’s
side center pillar outer panel. If you
cannot reach a service station or if
the tire cannot hold the newly added
air, replace the low pressure tire with
the compact spare tire.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
may turn on and the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will remain on after
restarting and about 20 minutes of
continuous driving before you have
the low-pressure tire repaired and
replaced on the vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
The compact spare tire is not
equipped with a tire pressure sensor.
69
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The low tire pressure telltale will illu-
minate after it blinks for approximate-
ly one minute when there is a prob-
lem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring system.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
What to do in an emergency
106
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will turn on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble or replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the compact spare tire, the
Low Tire Pressure telltale will remain
on until the low pressure tire is
repaired and placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the compact spare tire, the
TPMS malfunction indicator may be
illuminated after a few minutes
because the compact spare tire does
not have a sensor.
Once the low pressure tire is re-
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure and installed on the vehicle, the
TPMS malfunction indicator and the
low tire pressure telltale will extin-
guish within a few minutes.
If the indicators are not extinguished
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if
some electronic devices, such
as notebook computers, are
used in the vehicle. This can
interfere with normal opera-
tion of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
CAUTION
NEVER use a puncture-repair-
ing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. The tire
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. If used, you
will have to replace the tire pres-
sure sensor.
611
What to do in an emergency
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
Do not use any tire sealant if
your vehicle is equipped with a
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure sen-
sors.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
What to do in an emergency
126
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm level
ground. If you cannot find a
firm, level place off the road,
call a towing service company
for assistance.
(Continued)
OLM069001
613
What to do in an emergency
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
Replace the wing bolt body(1) after
tightening the wing bolt.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle or
P (Park) with automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack;
use vehicle support stands.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
OLM069002
1VQA4022
What to do in an emergency
146
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
1VQA4023 OLM069006
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
615
What to do in an emergency
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OCM049013N OCM054012
What to do in an emergency
166
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown in
the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an exten-
sion pipe over the wrench handle. Go
around the wheel tightening every nut
following the numerical sequence
shown in the image until they are all
tight. Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tight-
en the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that prevents with
the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If contact of
the mounting surface between
the wheel and hub is not good,
the wheel nuts could come
loose and cause the loss of a
wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
OLM069007
617
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, dust and dirt may get
into the tire valve and air may leak
from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
buy another and install it as soon as
possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-
tion 8.
What to do in an emergency
186
Important - use of compact spare tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
619
What to do in an emergency
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
206
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-
ing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.
On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must be
towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off
the ground.
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to tow
the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground (without dollies) and the front
wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
CAUTION
The AWD vehicle should never be
towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the AWD
system.
OUN046030
OUN046029
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
OXM069028
dolly
dolly
621
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook (rear)
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tow-
ing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the rear
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OLM069016L
OLM069014
OLM069015
■ Front
■ Rear
What to do in an emergency
226
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is cannot
be moved, do not forcibly contin-
ue the towing. Contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a com-
mercial tow truck service for
assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-
cle out of mud, sand or other condi-
tions from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequent-
ly.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
623
What to do in an emergency
• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5
m) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
OEN066014
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu-
tral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehi-
cle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1
mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, a
flatbed equipment or towing dolly
must be used.
What to do in an emergency
246
Tie-down hook
(for flatbed towing) (if equipped)
WARNING
• Do not use the hooks under the
front (or rear) of the vehicle for
towing purposes. These hooks
are designed ONLY for transport
tie-down. If the tie-down hooks
are used for towing, the tie-down
hooks or front (or rear) bumper
will be damaged and this could
lead to serious injury.
• The hooks should be placed
toward the front of the vehicle
when using the front holes and
should be placed toward the rear
of the vehicle when using the rear
holes for tie down purpose.
If not, the front or rear under
cover will be damaged.
OLM069017N
7
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-4
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-6
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-18
Engine oil / 7-21
Engine coolant / 7-22
Brake/clutch fluid / 7-25
Washer fluid / 7-26
Parking brake / 7-27
Air cleaner / 7-28
Climate control air filter / 7-29
Wiper blades / 7-31
Battery / 7-34
Tires and wheels / 7-37
Fuses / 7-50
Light bulbs / 7-59
Appearance care / 7-66
Emission control system / 7-72
California perchlorate notice / 7-75
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/Clutch* fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
* : if equipped
OLM079001
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
73
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehi-
cle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
perform this work.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac-
tory-trained technicians and genuine
HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality
service, see an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Owner’s Handbook & Warranty
Information booklet.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high
service quality standards and receives
technical support from HYUNDAI in
order to provide you with a high level of
service satisfaction.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, sev-
eral procedures can be done only by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special
tools.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the
warranty period may affect warranty
coverage. For details, read the separate
Owner’s Handbook & Warranty
Information booklet provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-
icing or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
47
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
75
Maintenance
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
eling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system during or after use is nor-
mal).
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check the radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check the windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean the wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened with
washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean the body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate the automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake/clutch* fluid level.
* : if equipped
Maintenance
67
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 90°F
(32°C).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After 120 months or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
77
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
Maintenance
87
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
2
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
2
: Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect crankcase ventilation hose
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
79
Maintenance
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
Maintenance
107
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect crankcase ventilation hose
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
3
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but
periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends
on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel
filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
3
: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-
essary.
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
2
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
2
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
*
2
: Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect crankcase ventilation hose
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but
periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends
on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel
filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
2
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
*
2
: Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
Maintenance
147
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect crankcase ventilation hose
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
3
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but
periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends
on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel
filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
3
: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-
essary.
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
715
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
Maintenance
7
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect electronic throttle control
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect crankcase ventilation hose
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
2
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
2
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
*
1
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but
periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends
on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel
filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
2
: Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
16
717
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal tem-
perature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart
below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I
MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I
FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR DISC BRAKE/PADS, PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
PROPELLER SHAFT I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, E
Maintenance
187
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is
being driven in severe conditions, more
frequent oil and filter changes are
required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-
ration and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as neces-
sary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
any damaged or leaking parts immedi-
ately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
719
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should
perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check for cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses
and connections for leakage and dam-
age. Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid should
be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer in accordance to the scheduled
maintenance at the beginning of this
chapter.
✽✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi-
cally red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
Maintenance
207
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake/Clutch* fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on the
side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic
brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT
4 specification.
* : if equipped
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system includ-
ing the parking brake pedal and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-
fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,
or damage. Start the engine and listen
carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.
Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
721
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
OLM079003N OLM079004N
CAUTION
Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
Maintenance
227
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-
ning of this section.
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
ENGINE COOLANT
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap while the engine is oper-
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage. Also, hot coolant or
steam could cause serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
CALIFORNIA
PROPOSI-
TION 65 WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer, birth defects, and
reproductive harm.
Used engine oil may cause irrita-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
723
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the engine is
cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent
additions are required, see an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system
inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deion-
ized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improp-
er coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
OLM079006
(Continued)
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
Maintenance
247
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
OLM079007
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such
as the generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze
Water
725
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID
Checking the brake/clutch* fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean the area
around the reservoir cap thoroughly to
prevent brake/clutch* fluid contamina-
tion.
*
:
if equipped
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake linings
and/or clutch disc (if equipped). If the
fluid level is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch* system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch* fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Brake/clutch*
fluid
When changing and adding
brake/clutch* fluid, handle it care-
fully. Do not let it come in contact
with your eyes. If brake/clutch* fluid
should come in contact with your
eyes, immediately flush them with a
large quantity of fresh tap water.
Have your eyes examined by a doc-
tor as soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of
brake/clutch* fluid
In the event the brake/clutch* system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLM079008N
CAUTION
Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended
time should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.
A few drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in your
brake/clutch* system can damage
brake/clutch* system parts.
Maintenance
267
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
OLM079010
727
Maintenance
Checking the parking brake
Type A
Check whether the stroke is within spec-
ification when the parking brake pedal is
depressed with 44 lb (20 kg, 196 N) of
force. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 4 notch
Type B
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 6 “clicks’’ at a force of
44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).
OLM059014
OLM059016
PARKING BRAKE
Maintenance
287
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals. (Refer to “Maintenance
under severe usage conditions” in this
section.)
OLM079012N OLM079013N OLM079014
729
Maintenance
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the Maintenance
Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support rod (1).
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use
of non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
OLM079015
Maintenance
307
2. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides.
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case pulling out both sides of the
cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽✽
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it properly. Otherwise, the
system may produce noise and the effec-
tiveness of the filter may be reduced.
OLM079016 OLM079017 OLM079018
731
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
shield wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
1JBA5122
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
Maintenance
327
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
OLM079200 OLM079201
OLM079202
733
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slight-
ly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper
blade.
OHM078062
OHM078063
Maintenance
347
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
BATTERY
OLM079019N
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
735
Maintenance
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).
(Continued)
CALIFORNIA
PROPOSI-
TION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and relat-
ed accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known
to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects, and reproduc-
tive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer. Wash
hands after handling.
Maintenance
367
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
(Continued)
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
737
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OLM089008N
Maintenance
387
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure.You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than one mile (1.6
km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41
kPa). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
739
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehi-
cle.
Maintenance
407
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
741
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
WARNING - Replacing
tires
To reduce the chance or serious
or fatal injuries from an acci-
dent caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same car. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheel other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehi-
cle control, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.
• Wheels that do not meet
HYUNDAI’s specifications may
fit poorly and result in damage
to the vehicle or unusual han-
dling and poor vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly (if
equipped).
Maintenance
427
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
743
Maintenance
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
225/55R18 105T
225 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
105 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5JX18
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
Maintenance
447
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1609 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2009.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
745
Maintenance
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Maintenance
467
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transaxle,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
747
Maintenance
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Maintenance
487
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. if you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
749
Maintenance
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the drive wheels as fol-
lows.
2WD : Front wheels
AWD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not
available for a AWD vehicle,
chains may be installed on
the front wheels only.
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-
low is: Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
WARNING - Snow or ice
• When driving on roads cov-
ered with snow or ice, drive at
less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to avoid
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driv-
ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on
vehicles equipped with alu-
minum wheels. In unavoid-
able circumstance, use a wire
type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inches (15 mm) to prevent
damage to the chain’s con-
nection.
Maintenance
507
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 3 fuse panels, one locat-
ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the
other in the engine compartment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will
melt.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Four kinds of fuse are used: blade type,
cartridge type, multi fuse and main fuse.
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary
repair. It may cause extensive
wiring damage and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
OLM079051N
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Multi fuse
Main fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal Blown
751
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the instru-
ment panel fuse panel (or in the engine
compartment fuse panel).
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse panel in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
OLM079020
OLM079021N
Maintenance
527
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse to prevent battery discharge if your
vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the memory fuse.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
• Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be dis-
charged by operation of the head-
lights or other electrical devices.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the cover
up.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine com-
partment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OLM079023NOLM079022
753
Maintenance
Main fuse and Multi fuse
If the main fuse and Multi fuse is blown,
it must be removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water contact.
OLM079052N
Maintenance
547
✽✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
Instrument panel fuse panel
Engine compartment fuse panel
OLM079026/OLM079027N/OLM079053N
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
755
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
AUDIO 1 10A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Module
ROOM LP
(MEMORY FUSE)
10A
BCM, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Room Lamp, Driver/Passenger Vanity Lamp Switch,
Date Link Connector, Door warning Switch, RF Receiver, A/C Control Module, Luggage Lamp,
IPS Control Module, Instrument Cluster (IND.), Map Lamp, Electro Chromic Mirror
MODULE 2 10A IPS Control Module, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror, PDM
START 10A Burglar Alarm Relay, E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Start Relay)
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)
CLUSTER 10A Audio, Console Switch, Instrument Cluster(IND.), BCM, Alternator, A/V & Navigation Head Module
MODULE 4 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Blower Relay), Cluster Ionizer, A/C Control Module, Sunroof Motor
POWER OUTLET 2 25A Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet, Rear Power Outlet
AUDIO 2 10A Power Outside Mirror Switch, AMP, BCM, PDM, A/V & Navigation Head Module, Audio
A/BAG 10A SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor
MODULE 1 10A
IPS Control Module, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, EPS Control Module, Steering Angle Sensor,
ESC OFF Switch, DBC Switch, ICM Relay Box(DBC Relay), Multifunction Switch(Light),
Stop Lamp Switch, AWD ECM
FOG LP RR 10A -
WIPER FRT 25A Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch(Wiper), E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Front Wiper Relay)
S/HEATER FRT 15A Console Switch
POWER OUTLET 1 15A Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet
Maintenance
567
Description Fuse rating Protected component
B/UP LP 10A B/UP LP Relay
DR LOCK 15A Door Lock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, Door Unlock Relay
MODULE 5 7.5A BCM, PDM
WIPER RR 15A ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
SUNROOF 15A Sunroof Motor
IGN 1 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(ECU 2 7.5A, ABS 7.5A, TCU 2 7.5A)
A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module
S/HEATER RR 15A -
P/WDW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH
MODULE 3 10A -
P/SEAT (DRV) 20A Driver Seat Manual Switch
PDM 15A PDM
P/WDW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH
AMP 25A AMP
HTD MIRR 7.5A Rear Defogger Switch, Rear Defogger (+), Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
SAFETY POWER WINDOW 20A Driver Safety Power Window Module
TPMS 7.5A ATM Shift Lever, AWD ECM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module
HAZARD 15A ICM Relay Box(Flasher Sound Relay), BCM
757
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
MDPS 80A EPS Control Module
B+1 60A I/P Junction Box(PDM 15A, DR LOCK 15A, HAZARD 15A, IPS 4, IPS 5, IPS 6, IPS 7)
ABS 2 40A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module
EMS 40A EMS Box(TCU 1 15A, ECU 30A, A/CON 10A, F/PUMP 15A)
ABS 1 40A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
B+3 60A
I/P Junction Box(P/SEAT(DRV) 20A, SAFETY POWER WINDOW 20A, TPMS 7.5A,
Power Connector(AUDIO 1 10A, ROOM LP 10A))
B+2 60A I/P Junction Box(Power Window Relay, SUNROOF 15A, AMP 25A, IPS 0, IPS 1, IPS 2, IPS 3)
FUSE
C/FAN 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(C/FAN LO Relay, C/FAN HI Relay)
RR HTD 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(RR HTD Relay)
IGN 1 40A PDM Relay Box(IGN1 Relay), Ignition Switch
IGN 2 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Statr Relay), PDM Relay Box(IGN2 Relay), Ignition Switch
HORN 15A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Horn Relay, B/A Horn Relay)
DEICER 15A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Deicer Relay, RR HTD Relay)
STOP LP 10A Stop Lamp Switch, ICM Relay Box(DBC Relay)
B+ SENSOR 10A Batter Sensor
TCU 2 7.5A Transaxle Range Switch(A/T), Vehicle Speed Sensor(M/T)
ABS 7.5A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module
ECU 2 7.5A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(ATM P/N Relay), Mass Air Flow Sensor, PCM
F/PUMP 15A EMS Box(F/PUMP Relay)
Maintenance
587
Description Fuse rating Protected component
FUSE
SENSOR 4 15A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box(C/FAN HI, LO Relay), EMS Box(F/PUMP Relay),
Oxygen Sensor (UP, DOWN), PCM
SENSOR 3 10A EMS Box(A/CON Relay), Injector(#1, #2, #3, #4)
SENSOR 2 10A -
TCU 1 15A PCM
A/CON 10A EMS Box(A/CON Relay)
SENSOR 1 10A
Crankshaft Position Sensor, Camshaft Position Sensor #1/2, Oil Control Valve #1/2,
Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Manifold Valve, Canister Close Valve
ECU 1 20A Ignition Colil (#1, #2, #3, #4), Condenser
ECU 30A EMS Box(Engine Control Relay)
759
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Headlight, position light, turn sig-
nal light, side marker light and
front fog light bulb replacement
(1) Front turn signal light
(2) Position light
(3) Headlight (High/Low)
(4) Front side marker light
(5) Front fog light (if equipped)
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fin-
gers or receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. In many cases, it is difficult
to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle
must be removed before you can
get to the bulb. This is especially
true if you have to remove the head-
light assembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing
the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
OLM079029
Maintenance
607
Headlight bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and push-
ing it upward.
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
OLM079030
761
Maintenance
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap
the headlight bulb retaining wire into
position by aligning the wire with the
groove on the bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-
ing it clockwise.
Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal light/Position light
1. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket
3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
4. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
OLM079046
Maintenance
627
Side repeater light replacement
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
(5) Rear side marker light
Outside light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a philips head screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
OLM079031
OLM079033
OLM079034
OLM079035
763
Maintenance
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Inside light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover using a flat-
blade screwdriver.
OLM079036 OLM079047
Maintenance
647
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
High mounted stop light
replacement
If the light is not operating, have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Remove the lens by pressing the tabs.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket and
install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.
OLM079038
OLM079039 OLM079055
765
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-
ton is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
Map lamp
Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
Sunvisor lamp
Room lamp
OLM079040/OXM079041/OLM079042/
OLM079044/OLM079045
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
Maintenance
667
APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water. Water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts, do not clean with chemical
solvents or strong detergents.
767
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
OJB037800
Maintenance
687
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleaners containing
acid or acid detergents. It may damage
and corrode the aluminum wheels
coated with a clear protective finish.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
769
Maintenance
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle
is regularly exposed to corrosive materi-
als, corrosion protection is particularly
important. Some of the common causes
of accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your vehicle
clean and free of mud or accumulations
of other materials. This applies not only
to the visible surfaces but particularly to
the underside of the vehicle.
Maintenance
707
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your vehicle clean and free of cor-
rosive materials. Attention to the under-
side of the vehicle is particularly impor-
tant.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your vehicle
at least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the vehicle,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your vehicle
in the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
771
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as per-
fume and cosmetic oil from contacting
the dashboard because they may cause
damage or discoloration. If they do con-
tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-
diately. See the instructions for the prop-
er way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electrical/elec-
tronic components inside the vehi-
cle as this may damage them.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
Maintenance
727
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information book-
let in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your vehicle
inspected and maintained by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manu-
al.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
(including ORVR: Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow
the vapors from the fuel tank to be
loaded into a canister while refueling at
the gas station, preventing the escape of
fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)
773
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
Engine exhaust gas precautions (car-
bon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though color-
less and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-
TION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehi-
cle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Maintenance
747
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-
line engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
WARNING - Fire
A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegetation,
paper, leaves, etc.
775
Maintenance
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as
air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners
and keyless remote entry batteries, must
be disposed of according to Title 22
California Code of Regulations Section
67384.10 (a).
8
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-2
Tires and wheels / 8-3
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6
Vehicle certification label / 8-6
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-7
Engine number / 8-7
Consumer information / 8-8
Reporting safety defects / 8-9
Binding arbitration / 8-9
Specifications, Consumer information,
Reporting safety defects
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
28
Item in (mm)
Overall length 173.2 (4400)
Overall width 71.7 (1820)
Overall height 65.2 (1655) / 66.3 (1685)*
1
Front tread 62.4 (1585)
Rear tread 62.44 (1586)
Wheelbase 103.9 (2640)
DIMENSIONS
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlights (High/Low) 60/55
Front turn signal lights 28/8
Position lights 5
Side repeater lights LED
Front side marker lights 5
Front fog lights* 27
Stop and tail lights 28/8
Rear turn signal lights 27
Back-up lights 16
Rear side marker lights* 5
High mounted stop light LED
License plate lights 5
Map lamps 10
Room lamps 10
Luggage lamp* 5
Glove box lamp 5
Vanity mirror lamps 5
BULB WATTAGE
* : if equipped
*
1
: with roof rack
83
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
TIRES AND WHEELS
Front Rear
225/60R17 6.5J×17 230 230
225/55R18 6.5J×18 (33) (33)
420 420
T155/90D16 4.0T×16
(60) (60)
Full size tire
Compact spare tire
Wheel lug nut torque
lb•ft (kgf•m, N•m)
65~79
(9~11 , 88~107)
Item
Tire
size
Wheel size
Inflation pressure
kPa (psi)
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
48
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
Lubricant
Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
2.0 Engine
4.33 US qt. (4.1 l)
API Service SM*
3
,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
2.4 Engine
4.76 US qt. (4.5 l)
Manual transaxle fluid
2.0 Engine
1.90 US qt. (1.8 l)
API GL-4, SAE 75W/85
2.4 Engine
2.22 US qt. (2.1 l)
Automatic transaxle fluid
7.50 US qt. (7.1 l)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV or other
brands meeting the above specification approved by
Hyundai Motor Co.,
Coolant
7.19 US qt. (6.8 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base
coolant for aluminum radiator)
Brake/clutch fluid
0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear axle oil (AWD)
0.69 US qt. (0.65 l)
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Transfer case oil (AWD)
0.63 US qt. (0.6 l)
Fuel
14.5 US gal. (55 l)
-
85
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those rec-
ommended could result in engine dam-
age.
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be oper-
ated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
*
1
For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-
20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select
the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
68
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check the
number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
OLM089002N
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OLM089006N
OLM089001
Frame number VIN label
87
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-
ommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
OLM089008N
OLM089003
ENGINE NUMBER
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
88
This consumer information has been pre-
pared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation. Your
Hyundai dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this
information.
Hyundai motor vehicles are designed
and manufactured to meet or exceed all
applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly
urge you to read and follow all directions
in this Owner's Manual, particularly the
information under the headings
"NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-
ING".
If, after reading this manual, you have
any questions regarding the operation of
your vehicle, please contact your nearest
Hyundai Motor America Regional Office
as listed in the following:
Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,
New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, Vermont.
Eastern Region
1100 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,
North Carolina, South Carolina.
Southern Region
270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A
Austell, GA 30168
(800) 633-5151
South Central Region: Alabama,
Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi,
Missouri, New Mexico, Oklahoma,
Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,
Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,
Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota,
Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive
Aurora, Illinois 60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,
Arizona, Colorado, ldaho, Montana,
Nevada, Oregon, Utah, Washington,
Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O.Box 20850
Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
California Region: California
California Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O. Box 20850
Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
CONSUMER INFORMATION
89
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You
can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safer-
car.gov.
Any claim or dispute you may have relat-
ed to your vehicle's warranty or the duties
contemplated under the warranty, includ-
ing claims related to the refund or partial
refund of your vehicle's purchase price
(excluding personal injury or product lia-
bility claims), shall be resolved by binding
arbitration. Binding arbitration shall be
administered by and through the National
Arbitration Forum (NAF) or the American
Arbitration Association (AAA), under the
Code of Procedure of the entity you
select.
You will not be responsible for paying fil-
ing and hearing fees above $275.00. All
other arbitration costs shall be borne by
Hyundai Motor America. You are not
responsible to pay any of the costs
Hyundai incurs.
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
not deprive you of any remedies avail-
able to you under applicable law. The
parties are waiving their right to seek
remedies in court, including the right to a
jury trial.
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
be governed by and interpreted under
the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. sec-
tions 1-16. Judgment upon any award
may be entered in any court having juris-
diction.
You may revoke this Arbitration
Agreement by (1) written notice or (2)
electronic notice. Written notice must be
delivered (via certified mail) to Hyundai
Motor America, Attn: Consumer Affairs,
10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box 20849,
Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.
Electronic notice must be submitted at
the following website address: http://war-
ranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.
Notice must be received within 90 days
after you purchase your vehicle.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
BINDING ARBITRATION (U.S.A ONLY)
I
Index
Index
2
I
Air bags··········································································3-38
Air bag warning label··················································3-63
Air bag warning light ··················································3-41
Curtain air bag ·····························································3-55
Driver's and passenger's front air bag··························3-49
Occupant classification system ···································3-44
Side impact air bag······················································3-53
Air cleaner ·····································································7-28
Alarm system ···································································4-7
All wheel drive (AWD)··················································5-17
Antenna··········································································4-90
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ······································5-27
Appearance care·····························································7-66
Exterior care ································································7-66
Interior care ·································································7-71
Armrest ··········································································3-13
Ashtray···········································································4-83
Audio system ·································································4-90
Antenna········································································4-90
Steering wheel audio control·······································4-90
Auto lock mode (Passenger seat belt) ···························3-33
Automatic climate control system ·································4-71
Air conditioning ··························································4-77
Automatic heating and air conditioning······················4-72
Manual heating and air conditioning···························4-73
Automatic transaxle ·······················································5-10
Ignition key interlock system ······································5-14
Shift lock system ·························································5-14
Sports mode·································································5-13
Battery············································································7-34
Battery saver function····················································4-50
Before driving··································································5-3
Bottle holders, see cup holders······································4-84
Brake system··································································5-24
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ····································5-27
Electronic stability control (ESC) ·······························5-30
Parking brake·······························································5-25
Power brakes································································5-24
Brakes/clutch fluid·························································7-25
Bulb replacement ···························································7-59
Front fog light bulb replacement·································7-61
Headlight bulb replacement·········································7-60
High mounted stop light replacement ·························7-64
Interior light bulb replacement····································7-65
License plate light bulb replacement···························7-64
Position light bulb replacement···································7-61
Rear combination light bulb replacement ···················7-62
Side marker light bulb replacement ····························7-61
Side repeater light bulb replacement···························7-62
Turn signal light bulb replacement······························7-61
Bulb wattage ····································································8-2
A
B
I
3
Index
California Perchlorate Notice ········································7-75
Capacities (Lubricants)····················································8-4
Care
Exterior care ································································7-66
Interior care ·································································7-71
Tire care·······································································7-37
Cargo capacity ·······························································5-57
Cargo security screen·····················································4-87
Cargo weight··································································5-61
Center console storage···················································4-81
Central door lock switch················································4-10
Certification label ··························································5-59
Changing a tire with TPMS···········································6-10
Changing tires································································6-13
Chains
Safety chains································································5-51
Tire chains ···································································7-49
Tire chains ···································································5-47
Checking tire inflation pressure·····································7-38
Child restraint system ····················································3-30
Auto lock mode (Passenger seat belt) ·························3-33
Tether anchor system···················································3-35
Lower anchor system···················································3-36
Child-protector rear door lock ·······································4-12
Climate control system (Automatic) ·····························4-71
Air conditioning ··························································4-77
Automatic heating and air conditioning······················4-72
Manual heating and air conditioning···························4-73
Climate control system (Manual) ·································4-62
Air conditioning ··························································4-67
Heating and air conditioning ·······································4-63
Cigarette lighter ·····························································4-83
Climate control air filter ················································4-69
Climate control air filter ················································7-29
Clock (Digital) ·······························································4-86
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ···············4-33
Compact spare tire ·························································6-18
Compact spare tire replacement ····································7-42
Consumer information ·····················································8-8
Coolant···········································································7-22
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ··································7-22
Crankcase emission control system·······························7-72
Cruise control system ····················································5-36
Cup holder ·····································································4-84
Curtain air bag ·······························································3-55
Dashboard, see instrument cluster·································4-33
Dashboard illumination,
see instrument panel illumination ·······························4-34
Defogging (Windshield) ················································4-78
Defogging logic (Windshield) ·······································4-80
Defroster (Rear window) ···············································4-60
Defrosting (Windshield) ················································4-78
C
D
Index
4
I
Digital clock···································································4-86
Dimensions ······································································8-2
Displays, see instrument cluster ····································4-33
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination···4-34
Door locks········································································4-9
Central door lock switch ·············································4-10
Child-protector rear door lock·····································4-12
Drinks holders, see cup holders·····································4-84
Driver's air bag·······························································3-49
Driving at night······························································5-43
Driving in flooded areas ················································5-44
Driving in the rain··························································5-44
Economical operation ····················································5-40
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ·····································4-30
Electronic power steering ·············································4-28
Emergency starting ··························································6-4
Jump starting ·································································6-4
Push starting ··································································6-5
Emergency tailgate safety release··································4-14
Emergency towing ·························································6-21
Emergency while driving·················································6-2
Emission control system················································7-72
Crankcase emission control system·····························7-72
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR)
System ·······································································7-72
Exhaust emission control system ································7-73
Engine compartment ················································2-4, 7-2
Engine coolant ·······························································7-22
Engine number·································································8-7
Engine oil·······································································7-21
Engine overheats······························································6-6
Engine temperature gauge ·············································4-35
Engine will not start·························································6-3
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR) System ··7-72
Exhaust emission control system···································7-73
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ···············7-18
Exterior care···································································7-66
Exterior features·····························································4-89
Roof rack ·····································································4-89
Flat tire···········································································6-12
Changing tires······························································6-13
Compact spare tire·······················································6-18
Jack and tools ······························································6-12
Removing and storing the spare tire····························6-13
Floor mat anchor(s) ·······················································4-86
Fluid
Washer fluid·································································7-26
Brakes/clutch fluid·······················································7-25
Folding the rear seat ······················································3-13
Four wheel drive (4WD), See all wheel drive (AWD) ··5-17
Front fog light bulb replacement ···································7-61
Front seat adjustment - manual ·······································3-5
E
F
I
5
Index
Front seat adjustment - power ·········································3-6
Fuel filler lid ··································································4-21
Fuel gauge······································································4-36
Fuel requirements ····························································1-3
Fuses ··············································································7-50
Fuse/relay panel description········································7-54
Main fuse and multi fuse·············································7-53
Memory fuse································································7-52
Gauge
Engine temperature gauge ···········································4-35
Fuel gauge ···································································4-36
Glassroof, see sunroof ···················································4-24
Glove box·······································································4-81
Hazard warning flasher··················································4-49
Hazardous driving conditions ········································5-42
Headlight bulb replacement···········································7-60
Headlight escort function···············································4-50
Headlight welcome function··········································4-50
Headrest··································································3-8, 3-12
Heating and air conditioning ·········································4-63
High mounted stop light replacement ···························7-64
Highway driving ····························································5-45
Hitches ···········································································5-51
Hood···············································································4-19
Horn ···············································································4-29
How to use this manual ···················································1-2
Ignition key interlock system ········································5-14
Indicators and warnings·················································4-40
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster ···················1-7
Instrument cluster ··························································4-33
Engine temperature gauge ···········································4-35
Fuel gauge ···································································4-36
Instrument panel illumination ·····································4-34
Odometer/Tripmeter ····················································4-37
Speedometer ································································4-34
Tachometer ··································································4-34
Trip computer ······························································4-36
Warning and indicators················································4-40
Instrument panel illumination········································4-34
Instrument panel overview···············································2-3
Interior care····································································7-71
Interior features······························································4-83
Ashtray ········································································4-83
Cigarette lighter ···························································4-83
Cargo security screen ··················································4-87
Cup holder ···································································4-84
Digital clock ································································4-86
Floor mat anchor(s) ·····················································4-86
Luggage net (holder) ···················································4-87
Power outlet·································································4-85
G
I
H
Index
6
I
Sunvisor ·······································································4-84
Interior light ···································································4-58
Interior light bulb replacement ······································7-65
Interior overview······························································2-2
Interlock system·····························································5-14
Jack and tools·································································6-12
Jump starting····································································6-4
Key positions ···································································5-5
Keys ·················································································4-3
Label
Air bag warning label··················································3-63
Certification label ························································5-59
Tire and loading information label······························5-57
Tire sidewall labeling ··················································7-43
Tire specification and pressure label ·····························8-7
Vehicle certification label··············································8-6
Latch system, see lower anchor system·························3-36
License plate light bulb replacement·····························7-64
Light bulbs ·····································································7-59
Headlight bulb replacement·········································7-60
Position light bulb replacement···································7-61
Turn signal light bulb replacement······························7-61
Side marker light bulb replacement ····························7-61
Front fog light bulb replacement·································7-61
High mounted stop light replacement ·························7-64
Interior light bulb replacement····································7-65
License plate light bulb replacement···························7-64
Rear combination light bulb replacement ···················7-62
Side repeater light bulb replacement···························7-62
Lighting··········································································4-50
Battery saver function··················································4-50
Headlight escort function ············································4-50
Headlight welcome function ·······································4-50
Low tire pressure telltale ·················································6-8
Lower anchor system·····················································3-36
Lubricants and capacities·················································8-4
Luggage net (holder) ·····················································4-87
Luggage rack, see roof rack···········································4-89
Lumbar support································································3-7
Main fuse and multi fuse ···············································7-53
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ·············7-18
Maintenance services·····················································7-3
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ···············7-17
Normal maintenance schedule·······································7-7
Owner maintenance·······················································7-4
Scheduled maintenance service·····································7-6
Tire maintenance ·························································7-42
K
L
M
J
I
7
Index
Maintenance services·······················································7-3
Manual climate control system······································4-62
Air conditioning ··························································4-67
Climate control air filter··············································4-69
Heating and air conditioning ·······································4-63
Manual heating and air conditioning·····························4-73
Manual transaxle······························································5-7
Memory fuse··································································7-52
Mirrors ···········································································4-30
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)···································4-30
Inside rearview mirror ·················································4-30
Outside rearview mirror ··············································4-31
Moonroof, see sunroof···················································4-24
Neck restraints, see headrest ··································3-8, 3-12
Occupant classification system······································3-44
Odometer/Tripmeter ······················································4-37
Oil (Engine) ···································································7-21
Outside rearview mirror·················································4-31
Overheats ·········································································6-6
Owner maintenance ·························································7-4
Panorama sunroof ··························································4-24
Parking brake ·································································7-27
Parking brake ·································································5-25
Passenger's front air bag ················································3-49
Position light bulb replacement ·····································7-61
Power brakes··································································5-24
Power outlet ···································································4-85
Power window lock button ············································4-18
Pre-tensioner seat belt····················································3-24
Push starting·····································································6-5
Rear combination light bulb replacement······················7-62
Rear seat adjustment······················································3-12
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ··················7-37
Recommended lubricants and capacities·························8-4
Recommended SAE viscosity number··························8-5
Remote keyless entry·······················································4-4
Reporting safety defects ··················································8-9
Road warning···································································6-2
Rocking the vehicle ·······················································5-42
Roof rack ·······································································4-89
Safety chains··································································5-51
Scheduled maintenance service ·······································7-6
Normal maintenance schedule·······································7-7
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ···············7-17
Seat belts········································································3-16
Pre-tensioner seat belt ·················································3-24
N
O
P
R
S
Index
8
I
Seat belt - Driver's ·······················································3-18
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat ···················3-19
Seat belt warning ·························································3-17
Seat warmer ···································································3-10
Seatback pocket ·····························································3-11
Seating capacity ·····························································5-57
Seats ·················································································3-2
Armrest ········································································3-13
Headrest································································3-8, 3-12
Folding the rear seat ····················································3-13
Front seat adjustment - manual ·····································3-5
Front seat adjustment - power ·······································3-6
Lumbar support ·····························································3-7
Rear seat adjustment····················································3-12
Seatback pocket···························································3-11
Seat warmer·································································3-10
Shift lock system ···························································5-14
Side impact air bag ························································3-53
Side marker light bulb replacement·······························7-61
Side repeater light bulb replacement ·····························7-62
Spare tire
Compact spare tire·······················································6-18
Compact spare tire replacement ··································7-42
Removing and storing the spare tire····························6-13
Smooth cornering···························································5-43
Snow tires ······································································7-48
Snow tires ······································································5-46
Special driving conditions ·············································5-42
Driving at night ···························································5-43
Driving in flooded areas··············································5-44
Driving in the rain ·······················································5-44
Hazardous driving conditions······································5-42
Highway driving ··························································5-45
Rocking the vehicle ·····················································5-42
Smooth cornering ························································5-43
Speedometer···································································4-34
Sports mode ···································································5-13
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start··················6-3
Starting the engine ···························································5-6
Steering wheel ·······························································4-28
Horn·············································································4-29
Electronic power steering············································4-28
Tilt steering··································································4-28
Steering wheel audio control ·········································4-90
Storage compartment ·····················································4-81
Center console storage·················································4-81
Glove box ····································································4-81
Sunglass holder····························································4-82
Summer tires··································································7-48
Sunglass holder······························································4-82
Sunroof···········································································4-24
Sunvisor ·········································································4-84
Tachometer·····································································4-34
Tailgate···········································································4-13
Emergency tailgate safety release ·······························4-14
T
I
9
Index
Tether anchor system ·····················································3-35
Theft-alarm system ··························································4-7
Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing) ······························6-24
Tilt steering ····································································4-28
Tire and loading information label ································5-57
Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS)······················6-7
Changing a tire with TPMS·········································6-10
Low tire pressure telltale ···············································6-8
TPMS (Tire pressure monitoring system)
malfunction indicator ··················································6-9
Tire specification and pressure label ·······························8-7
Tires and wheels·····················································7-37, 8-3
All season tires ····························································7-48
Checking tire inflation pressure ··································7-38
Compact spare tire replacement ··································7-42
Radial-ply tires ····························································7-49
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ················7-37
Snow tires ····································································7-48
Summer tires································································7-48
Tire care·······································································7-37
Tire chains ···································································7-49
Tire maintenance ·························································7-42
Tire replacement ··························································7-41
Tire rotation ·································································7-39
Tire sidewall labeling ··················································7-43
Tire terminology and definitions ·································7-46
Tire traction ·································································7-42
Wheel alignment and tire balance ·······························7-40
Wheel replacement ······················································7-42
Towing ···········································································6-20
Emergency towing·······················································6-21
Removable towing hook (rear)····································6-21
Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing) ····························6-24
Towing capacity·····························································5-57
Trailer towing·································································5-50
Hitches·········································································5-51
Safety chains································································5-51
Trailer brakes·······························································5-51
Weight of the trailer (tongue) ······································5-56
Transaxle
Automatic transaxle·····················································5-10
Manual transaxle ···························································5-7
Tripmeter········································································4-37
Trip computer ································································4-36
Turn signal light bulb replacement································7-61
Vehicle break-in process ··················································1-5
Vehicle certification label ················································8-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders·············1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN)·······························8-6
Vehicle load limit···························································5-57
Cargo capacity·····························································5-57
Certification label ························································5-59
Seating capacity···························································5-57
Tire and loading information label······························5-57
Towing capacity···························································5-57
Vehicle capacity weight···············································5-57
V
Index
10
I
Vehicle weight ·······························································5-61
Base curb weight ·························································5-61
Cargo weight ·······························································5-61
GAW (Gross axle weight) ···········································5-61
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) ······························5-61
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)······································5-61
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)·························5-61
Washer fluid···································································7-26
Waste tray, see ashtray···················································4-83
Warnings and indicators ················································4-40
Weight ············································································5-61
Base curb weight ·························································5-61
Cargo weight ·······························································5-61
GAW (Gross axle weight) ···········································5-61
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) ······························5-61
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)······································5-61
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)·························5-61
Wheel alignment and tire balance ·································7-40
Wheel replacement ························································7-42
Windows ········································································4-15
Auto up/down window ················································4-17
Power window lock button··········································4-18
Windshield defrosting and defogging····························4-78
Defogging logic···························································4-80
Winter driving································································5-46
Snow tires ····································································5-46
Tire chains ···································································5-47
Wiper blades ··································································7-31
Wipers and washers ·······················································4-54
W
